KHSAA COMPETITION RULES Governing Baseball

KHSAA COMPETITION RULES b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record Governing Baseball in the fi rst game played against all district opponents (As Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) involved in the tie. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the breaker. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING shall be the next tie-breaker. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team postseason competition in baseball for boys, provided that there drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is approved by seed (one seed) the Board of Control. f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic would be uniform for all three-team districts. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. tie-breaking purposes. 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For district tournaments with four or more teams, the district on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the district is required in order B) District Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For district tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the districts shall only two teams the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a district a) The head to head results from the regular season shall with four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number one (1) seed for a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including postseason play. all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the b) The number one (1) seed shall host the district tournament participating teams in the district and the manager shall (region if the sport does not have districts) and shall be the record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. designated home team, even if unable to host the game at The representatives making the written declaration shall their home site due to facility requirements in the sport. decide all issues related to seeding. 2) For district tournaments with three teams, the district b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of tournament shall be seeded in accordance with the following the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided three-team seeding rules: to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote a) The competing teams within a district shall, by majority vote, of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding determine if the schools are required to play each other once decisions. Such changes to the district seeding plan may not or twice during the regular season. These games will produce be made for the current year once play has begun in the a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these regular season. districts. c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. the district tournament, and advances to the championship d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of game. the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of position. the district tournament with the loser of that game being e) It shall be the district tournament manager’s responsibility eliminated. to update the Association with respect to any changes to d) In the case of a two-way tie for the district winning position, the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant

CCompetition Rules tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation

o (1) The tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall be: m a. In districts that have decided to play each other only once with, and written veriﬁ cation and documentation from, prior p year tournament managers, will be utilized by staff to assist e in district play, the winner in the game played between

t i with interpretation and clariﬁ cation.

i the tied district opponents would have the higher o f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once the n ﬁ nishing position.

R determination has been made to seed. Some of the more u b. In districts that have decided to play each other twice l common and recommended means of seeding is the record e in district play, the winner in the second game played

s between the tied district opponents would have the of games played within a district provided all teams have higher fi nishing position. played all other teams. In that case, each district shall adopt e) In the case of a three-way tie for the district winning position, tie-breaking procedures in the event that the primary method the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of of seeding results in a tie or other situations arise which cause the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the an alteration in the scheduled seeding method. Among the other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result more common tie-breaking methods are: in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (1) seeding by overall win-loss record; tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between (2) seeding by win-loss record in specifi c contests, those two. (3) seeding by a rating/ranking from a statewide poll, (1) In districts that have decided to play each other only once (4) seeding by a majority vote, in district play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The (5) seeding by a committee, team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest (6) seeding a specifi c team(s) into a position to avoid seed (one seed). scheduling complications and issues, and (2) In districts that have decided to play each other twice in (7) seeding by a rating turned in by each school. district play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used be: shall be the records as of midnight Wednesday prior to a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record the Monday of the week of the district tournament. Teams in the second game played against all district opponents and school representatives may meet during the regular involved in the tie. season to discuss tournament operations (i.e. dates, times, 1 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK sites, tournament personnel needs, etc.). However, if an information relating to the listed criteria for hosting. The organizational meeting is held prior to the published date Commissioner’s offi ce may use this site selection plan as a on the calendar, no discussions may be held regarding the guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining the sites. bracketing or pairings of specifi c teams unless all mandated 5) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for seeded games have been played prior to the meeting. recommending the region tournament sites and voting shall h) Seeded games unable to be played for any reason (with the include all schools within a region, not simply the schools exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published playing in a particular year’s event. deadline for seeded games shall be recorded as a win and a 6) Criteria to be considered by the schools for recommending loss for both teams in computing seeded position. regional tournament sites include but are not limited to: i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate team into a previously seeded district during the current past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; school year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If b) an offi cials dressing room; the new team enters the alignment following the completion c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and of all game contracts and the new team is unable to schedule d) meet the published site selection criteria for baseball as all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the posted on the KHSAA website. last position for the current season, and shall be included 7) The schools in the district and region shall agree on the amount in seeded game scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a of proceeds (if any) that is to be kept by the host school as well single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the as limitations on expenses by the host school; determining the previous school year, the district teams will conduct a new fi xed amount or percentages to be given to each school that vote as to seeding. participates; the fi xed amount or percentages to be given to j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one each team in the region not competing in the tournament; and team into a seeded district, the district teams shall conduct a the disbursement of any proceeds from commissions, parking, new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding advertising and any other revenue related to the tournament but decision being not seeded. not directly related to ticket, program or novelty sales. Resolution k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams as to disputes on any of these issues may be facilitated by the within a district, the teams in the district shall conduct a new Commissioner’s offi ce and if agreement cannot be reached, may vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in be considered by the Board of Control. the district being not seeded. 8) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state l) Once a vote has been conducted for the district to be seeded, tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, all required contests shall be considered to be contracted and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school facilities, and community/area support. representatives do not notify all schools in the district of III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the A) Selection of Tournament Manager contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is not 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of specifi ed, a $1000 default forfeiture fee will be assessed for the school to serve as the manager for each district tournament. non-played contests. The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the region II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION tournaments. A) Dates for Play 2) It is the duty of each district and region tournament manager 1) District tournament play shall begin not later than Monday to invite representatives of the participating teams in the of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for district tournaments. tournament to a meeting held for the purpose of making Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament plans. than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. Tournaments 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform may begin prior to that Monday if all schools concur and all the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / regular season play is ended. entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according 2) Region tournament play shall begin not later than Tuesday to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for region tournaments. tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball, than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. fi eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact

CCompetition Rules 3) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated the KHSAA Scoreboard with the ﬁ nal results following each

o m on the Memorandum Calendar as local conditions permit. Any contest. This is in addition to fulﬁ lling local media requests. The p exceptions shall be approved by the Commissioner. receipts of a tournament can be assessed a ﬁ ne (levied against

t i B) Sites for Play the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions.

i o 1) District tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state

R plan approved by a 2/3 majority vote of the schools eligible to tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as

e compete in each district tournament. If a district is unable to deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will s resolve confl ict over the plan, the Commissioner shall establish direct a drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct a plan. the state tournament. 2) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to B) Tournament Meeting January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each having a schedule of ten (10) or more baseball games shall tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times be allowed to vote for the district tournament location or of the games, and make all other arrangements necessary to participate in the tournament. conduct the tournament. 3) Criteria to be considered by the schools for the district 2) The district meetings shall be held in the school designated as tournament include but are not limited to: the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar. past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all b) an offi cials dressing room; teams. c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and 3) The Region meeting shall be held on Sunday afternoon d) meet the published site selection criteria for baseball as immediately following the district tournaments not prior to 2:00 posted on the KHSAA website. local time in the school designated as the host. These meetings 4) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all teams, but not Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit prior to the completion of all district tournament games. The site their request through a meeting of the Principals or Designated for future regional tournaments is not an issue for this meeting Representatives of all schools in the region and shall supply unless the Principal or the Designated Representative as listed

2 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK on the KHSAA website is present for all teams in the region (not team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. limited to the competing teams). c) In a region tournament with participants from three districts, C) Tournament Pairings the draw shall be conducted as follows. The format will 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing follow a standard eight-team bracket with two byes, those for each school. falling into positions 2 and 7. The district winners shall draw 2) District (non-seeded): The pairings for the district tournament for positions 1 and 8 in the bracket. The district winner not shall be made in accordance with the following procedure, with drawing a bye shall draw for a position in slots 3 through all byes being arranged to be in the fi rst round: 6. The district runner-up to the district champion drawing for a) The appropriate bracket shall be used for team placement position in slots 3 through 6 will draw into one of the two according to the number of teams entering the tournament: remaining slots in the bracket opposite the district winner, and (1) For three (3) teams, the bracket is seeded by rule and form the remaining two runner-up teams will be placed opposite BR103 shall be used; their corresponding district winners in the remaining two slots (2) For four (4) teams, the unseeded BR104 shall be used; in the bracket. (3) For fi ve (5) teams, the unseeded BR105 shall be used; d) In a region tournament with participants from two districts, (4) For six (6) teams, the unseeded BR106 shall be used; the draw shall be conducted as follows. The district winners (5) For seven (7) teams, the unseeded BR107 shall be used; will draw for positions 1 and 3 in a standard four-team (6) For eight (8) teams, the unseeded BR108 shall be used; bracket. Each corresponding runner-up team will be placed in (7) If more than eight (8) teams are in the district bracket, the position in the opposite bracket from the district winner. contact the KHSAA offi ces for assistance in utilizing the e) In regions where the drawing of district boundaries result in unseeded BR116 bracket. two or three districts, the Board of Control may approve an b) The participants may determine the order in which the alternate format in order to allow for a full eight-team bracket bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to in the region tournament. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, f) The winner of each region tournament shall advance to the alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw state tournament. to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 5) Semi-State. which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may a) The state shall be divided into eight semi-state areas for both NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. boys and girls play for the fi rst round of the state tournament. c) The participants shall then draw for the non-BYE positions b) Each semi-state game shall be held at a fi eld that meets the in the bracket. For example, in a fi ve team bracket, the draw site specifi cations for holding a semi-state game whether or shall be for positions 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. not the host is playing in the contest. d) The home team shall be determined by the bracket form. c) The winner of each semi-state game advances to the State e) The games of the tournament shall be played in the order Tourament. listed on the bracket unless unanimous agreement is reached d) Unless further altered by the Board of Control, the semi-state among the competing teams due to facility logistics concerns. pairings for six-year period are: f) The district champion and the runner-up of each single SS 2018- 2019- 2020- 2021- 2022- 2023- elimination tournament shall advance to the region 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 1 1 @ 2 4 @ 1 1 @ 3 2 @ 1 1 @ 4 3 @ 1 tournament. 3) District (seeded): After seeding positions have been determined, 2 3 @ 4 2 @ 3 4 @ 2 4 @ 3 3 @ 2 2 @ 4 the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall 3 5 @ 6 8 @ 5 5 @ 7 6 @ 5 5 @ 8 7 @ 5 be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single 4 7 @ 8 6 @ 7 8 @ 6 8 @ 7 7 @ 6 6 @ 8 elimination bracket. The brackets (from top down) are as follows: 5 9 @ 10 12 @ 9 9 @ 11 10 @ 9 9 @ 12 11 @ 9 a) 2 Team - The district tournament shall then be a single game, 10 @ 10 @ 6 11 @ 12 11 12 @ 10 12 @ 11 11 @ 10 12 with the winner being advanced to the region tournament as 16 @ 15 @ the district winner (regardless of the regular season results). 7 13 @ 14 13 13 @ 15 14 @ 13 13 @ 16 13 14 @ 14 @ b) 3 Teams (seeded by rule) – Seed 2 plays 3, Seed 1 plays 8 15 @ 16 15 16 @ 14 16 @ 15 15 @ 14 16 winner of Seed 2 vs. Seed 3 for championship. c) 4 Teams - Seed 1 plays 4, 2 plays 3, winners meet for 6) State. The Commissioner shall conduct a blind draw to championship. determine the pairings for the state tournament. The winner of each of the sixteen (16) region tournaments shall advance to the

CCompetition Rules d) 5 Teams - Seed 5 plays 4, 1 plays winner of 5 vs. 4, 2 plays 3, o state tournament. m remaining winners meet for championship. p e) 6 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of 4 vs. 7) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing teams,

e t any bracket not drawn in accordance with the above procedures i 5, 2 plays winner of 3 vs. 6, remaining winners meet for

i o championship. may be directed to be corrected, including the replay of contests,

by the Commissioner’s ofﬁ ce. R f) 7 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of u IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS l 4 vs. 5, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, remaining winners

e s meet for championship. A) Roster Requirement g) 8 Teams - Seed 1 plays 8, 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 vs. 8 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on winner plays 4 vs. 5 winner, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its remaining winners meet for championship. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. h) The district champion and the runner-up of each single 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and elimination tournament shall advance to the region shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. tournament. 3) On the ﬁ rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked 4) Region: The pairings for the region tournament shall be made in so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised accordance to the following procedure. following this date, thereby creating the ﬁ nal eligibility list for a) The participants may determine the order in which the tournament play. bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw B) Withdrawal after draw to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 1) No school which enters a district, region or state tournament which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may (draws for place) shall withdraw from the tournament or forfeit NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. any of its games, but shall play its entire tournament schedule. b) In a region tournament with participants from four districts, 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region or state tournament the district winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a at any time following the draw for district tournament positions standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up or after the pairings have been determined in a seeded district,

3 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. 8) A crew of four (4) umpires shall be assigned to all region and C) Photo Requirement state tournament play; Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in 9) Umpires desiring to be assigned to the Region and State compliance with published deadlines and directives. Tournaments shall have, within the preceding four years, D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions attended the Baseball Advance Umpires Camp; and 1) A school may enter a team composed of twenty-one (21) 10) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play. players in each postseason tournament game from the roster 11)Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at submitted online. the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved 2) The twenty one (21) players shall be designated each game, and by the Commissioner. no other players may be in uniform and participate in warm-ups. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS 3) Tournament management may limit the total number of A) Champion individuals in the dugouts. 1) The champion of each district and region tournament will be the E) Minimum Number of Contests team undefeated in a single elimination tournament. To be eligible to compete in the district, region or state tournament, 2)The champion of the state tournament will be the winning team a member school team shall have competed in at least ten games in a single elimination tournament. during the regular season. B) Trophies and Awards V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament A) Umpires for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall winner and runner-up. be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). gate receipts of that tournament. B) Umpires assigned for championship play shall comply with the 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists published provisions of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. shall receive a trophy and twenty-four (24) individual medals. C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament contests shall be: including a Most Valuable Player. 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once tournament. every four years to be eligible for the four years following the VII) FINANCES, PASSES training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the A) District and Region KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts for state and regional play in the sports in which such training prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level payment made by teams to help offset event costs. by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance Commission; for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved tournament should be allowed. makeup clinic; b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or region sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences that are approved by the participating teams. as properly attending; c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of game offi cials and trophies. offi cials within a particular sport; and d) The remainder of the profi t shall be divided among the schools

CCompetition Rules 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 participating in the tournament and the non-participating

o m offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than schools in accordance with previously approved plans. p the published late deadline for licensing year. e e) The host school should be allowed the profi ts made on

t i D) Baseball Umpries shall meet the following criteria for postseason t programs, concessions, parking, etc.

i o assignments: B) State

R 1) Umpires for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition 1) The Association will ﬁ nance the state tournament. The following

l e shall be assigned by the Commission; allowances will apply if the receipts from the tournament make s 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the them justifi able, otherwise, the Board of Control will determine regional or state tournaments. Exceptions may be approved by the allowance. the Commission; 2) Expenses will be paid for meals, lodging and travel for each 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason team through breakfast on the day following elimination from assignments to district, region and state tournament contests the tournament for each team. through the Assigning Secretary. The fi nal selection shall be 3) The state tournament squad for purposes of reimbursement made by the Commission; shall be limited to twenty-four (24) persons, including the 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system principal, coaches, team members and other personnel. approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least 4) Schools failing to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The Association shall forfeit the lodging allowance. Schools within recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season forty (40) one-way miles will not be provided a lodging allowance, evaluations; but will be considered commuting teams. Commuting teams 5) The resultant rankings of offi cials (fi nal ranked list of scores) is shall be paid an allowance in accordance with pre-tournament public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT instructions. public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; 5) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per 6) A crew of two (2), three (3) or four (4) umpires shall be assigned mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of to regular season play; $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. 7) A crew of three (3) or four (4) umpires shall be assigned to all 6) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School district tournament play; Athletic Association shall retain profi ts from each state

4 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK tournament. listed below: 7) The competing teams in the state tournament will be afforded a) VARSITY LEVEL PITCHES THROWN IN ONE DAY REQUIRED passes to accommodate a traveling party of forty (40), to include REST the school principal(s) and other administrators, the coaching (1) Maximum Pitches – 120 staff, the team members in uniform (maximum 21) and the (2) 76 pitches or more – Three (3) calendar days of rest support staff for the team. No additional passes will be issued. (3) 51-75 – Two (2) calendar days of rest VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES (4) 26-50 – One (1) calendar day of rest A) Playing Rules (5) 1-25 – No mandated rest 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Baseball Rules b) JUNIOR VARSITY/FRESHMAN LEVEL PITCHES THROWN IN as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, ONE DAY REQUIRED REST governed by State Association adoption provisions in the (1) Maximum Pitches – 110 National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the (2) 66 pitches or more – Three (3) calendar days of rest Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky (3) 41-65 – Two (2) calendar days of rest and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. (4) 26-40 – One (1) calendar day of rest 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and (5) 1-25 – No mandated rest participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. c) MIDDLE SCHOOL LEVEL RECOMMENDATION PITCHES B) Pitching Limitations THROWN IN ONE DAY REQUIRED REST 1) For all interscholastic play including scrimmages, regular season (1) Maximum Pitches – 85 and all rounds of postseason, the limitation on picthing is based (2) 56 pitches or more – Three (3) calendar days of rest on the number of pitches thrown in a game with the following (3) 36-55 – Two (2) calendar days of rest provisions: (4) 20-35 – One (1) calendar day of rest a) The pitch count is based on pitches thrown for strikes (5) 1-19 – No mandated rest (including all foul balls); balls; balls in play and outs. C) Speed-Up Rules b) Warm-up pitches allowed before each inning, warm up All baseball contests shall utilize the optional speed-up rules pitches allowed by the umpire in case of injury or game delay, allowed by the National Federation as detailed for the courtesy and plays attempted against the batter-runner or any runner runner(s) for the pitcher and catcher upon reaching base. at fi rst, second or third base do not count against the limit. D) Specifi cations of Fields and Game Balls c) A pitcher at any level who reaches the pitch count limit in the 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards middle of an at-bat will be allowed to fi nish that hitter. for fi elds to be used in tournament play may be developed by d) All NFHS Substitution and Pitching Rules must be followed. Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the e) For pitchers pitching multiple levels, the most restrictive rule Board of Control. shall apply when there is confl ict. 2) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a f) The pitch count charts of both teams from prior contests are to ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. be presented to the opposing coach BEFORE the game. E) Coaching Uniform g) A Designated Pitch Count Recorder shall be designated by the 1) Coaches in the coaching boxes (fi rst and third bases) shall wear home team (DPCR). baseball uniform pants, shoes, stirrups (if worn by the team), h) During the game, pitch counts will be recorded by the DPCR and baseball/athletic shoes (no sandals, etc.) The top may differ and are to be reviewed between innings. Any discrepancy from the team uniform but shall, if not identically matching shall be settled by the DPCR without umpire involvement and the team uniform, contained readily identifi ed team references that record shall be considered fi nal. using either the school name or the school mascot. Such items i) A protest over a discrepancy in pitch counts discovered in a as golf polo shirts, wind shirts and other tops shall be allowed later inning from an earlier inning in the game will not be provided the proper school name/nickname provisions are met. permitted due to end of an inning verifi cation. Such items shall not be allowed if containing references to j) At game’s conclusion, the KHSAA pitch count form will be other school teams (i.e. X County football), or nonschool related signed by both head coaches or designated representatives. facilities (i.e. X County Country Club). k) Both schools have the responsibility to maintain every 2) Other coaches who may appear on the fi eld for conferences, pitching chart form until the school season is complete. including the pre-game conference, or offensive or defensive l) Any discrepancy found after the game will be reported to the charged conferences, shall be uniformly dressed in school

CCompetition Rules KHSAA and shall be treated as a potential eligibility issue to identiﬁ ed clothing. These individuals shall either be 1) wearing

o m resolve. baseball uniform pants, shoes, stirrups (if worn by the team), p m) The use of a pitcher not eligible to pitch by the pitch count and baseball/athletic shoes (no sandals, etc.) with the top

t i restrictions shall constitute the use of an ineligible player and provisions as speciﬁ ed for the base coaches; or 2) they may

i o result in contest forfeiture and additional penalties per Bylaw wear khaki dress slacks (full length), with appropriate shoes,

R 27. and the top provisions as speciﬁ ed for the base coaches.

u l F) Team Uniform e n) An archive copy of each game and the entire season must s be available upon KHSAA request at any point during and In KHSAA sanctioned postseason play, all players who enter the following the season. contest shall wear the same color and style uniform. o) For interpretations and clarifi cations, see http://khsaa. G) Interrupted Games org/021716-faqs-baseball-pitch-count-limitations/ 1) If a game is interrupted in tournament play or in regular season 2) DAILY LIMITATION play, and is subsequently to be completed, it will be reset at a) The limit on the number of pitches is based on the level of the same point, same inning, same out or outs, same balls and pitching. strikes, same batter or number of batter in the batting order. b) Specifi c rest periods are in place when a pitcher reaches a 2) If a game is interrupted and cannot be resumed that day, three threshold of pitches delivered in a day. choices exist for completing the game: c) The day of pitching for purpose of the limit is the calendar day a) If agreed by both teams, terminate game with score as it on which the game began, regardless of the completion time exists if such is allowable by the playing rules of the NFHS, of any interrupted game. and if such agreement is reached at the site, it shall be d) The calendar rest begins immediately following midnight considered fi nal; on the day following the date on which the game began b) If agreed by both teams, resume game at point of interruption regardless of the conclusion time of the game. at a mutually agreed date and time, provided that the date e) For state championship tournament play, all pitching shall be and time decision is fi nalized at the site prior to the teams established as being pitched on the day the fi rst game that departing, and if such agreement is reach at the site, it shall each specifi c round occurred. be considered fi nal; or 3) The rest periods required during the regular and postseason are c) If agreement cannot be reached, resume the game on the

5 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK next available playing date for both teams that does not confl ict with specifi c local board policies (i.e. Sunday play), does not violate the Bylaw 23 prohibition on playing games on consecutive days (Monday through Thursday) and based on schedules as published as of the interrupted game. If one of the competing teams on the fi rst available date chooses for any reason not to play, that team shall be considered to have forfeited the contest. If both teams choose not to play on the fi rst available date, the contest shall be offi cially recorded as a double forfeit and if it is a seeded district game, the required procedure utilized to determine counting toward seeding position. 3) If a game is interrupted and is to be resumed: a) The same offi cials are expected to return to complete contest; b) Substitute offi cials shall be paid the local policy board mileage add-on only; c) Local associations shall develop policy on compensation of substitute offi cials, such as pooling game fees, etc.; d) Offi cials have no say in the postponement decisions, except to moderate discussion; e) Offi cials and coaches should involve not solely coaches, but school administrators in the decision; and f) All involved shall remember that this situation is caused by elements such as weather that are uncontrollable by anyone, and keep the discussions in that perspective. g) There shall be no guarantee that infi eld will take place prior to the resumption of the interrupted game. 4) If a game is interrupted and unable to be completed, it shall be counted against all applicable game limits, including total number of games and all pitching restrictions. H) Complete Game and Run Rule 1) In regular season and postseason, a complete game of 6 1/2 or 7 innings shall be played unless other rules adopted by the Board of Control apply to the situation. 2) For all games, regular season and postseason, a ten (10) run differential between teams after fi ve or more complete innings (including after the top half if the home team is ahead) shall constitute a complete game. 3) For all games, regular season and postseason, a fi fteen (15) run differential between teams after three or more complete innings (including after the top half if the home team is ahead) shall constitute a complete game. I) Pitcher Warm-up Area 1) If the pitcher’s warm-up area is in live ball territory, only those individuals specifi ed by NFHS playing rules (pitcher - catcher - personal protector) may be in the live ball area during any warm-up period. 2) Only members of the team and adult coaches may serve as

CCompetition Rules personal protector, and all persons serving in that role shall

m wear a properly ﬁ tted helmet. p J) Use of Electronic Devices

t i 1) Electronic devices, such as radar devices to measure pitching

i o speed, may only be used by either team outside of the dugout

R with mutual consent of both teams.

u l 2) If either team objects, then the equipment shall be used in the

e s conﬁ nes of the dugout. L) Heat Index All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA. M) Deadline to Start Contest No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 p.m. local time at any contest site.

6 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record Governing Basketball in the fi rst game played against all district opponents (As Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) involved in the tie. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the breaker. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING shall be the next tie-breaker. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team postseason competition in basketball for boys and for girls, drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and seed (one seed) such is approved by the Board of Control. f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic would be uniform for all three-team districts. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. tie-breaking purposes. 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For district tournaments with four or more teams, the district on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the district is required in order B) District Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For district tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the districts shall only two teams the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a district a) The head to head results from the regular season shall with four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number 1 seed for postseason a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including play. all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the b) The number 1 seed shall host the district tournament (region if participating teams in the district and the manager shall the sport does not have districts) and shall be the designated record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. home team, even if unable to host the game at their home site The representatives making the written declaration shall due to facility requirements in the sport. decide all issues related to seeding, 2) For district tournaments with three teams, the district b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of tournament shall be seeded in accordance with the following the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided three-team seeding rules: to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote a) The competing teams within a district shall, by majority vote, of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding determine if the schools are required to play each other once decisions. Such changes to the district seeding plan may not or twice during the regular season. These games will produce be made for the current year once play has begun in the a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these regular season. districts. c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. the district tournament, and advances to the championship d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of game. the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of position. the district tournament with the loser of that game being e) It shall be the district tournament manager’s responsibility eliminated. to update the Association with respect to any changes to d) In the case of a two-way tie for the district winning position, the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant

CCompetition Rules tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation

t i with interpretation and clariﬁ cation.

i the tied district opponents would have the higher o f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once the n ﬁ nishing position.

s between the tied district opponents would have the of games played within a district provided all teams have higher fi nishing position. played all other teams. In that case, each district shall adopt e) In the case of a three-way tie for the district winning position, tie-breaking procedures in the event that the primary method the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of of seeding results in a tie or other situations arise which cause the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the an alteration in the scheduled seeding method. Among the other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result more common tie-breaking methods are: in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (1) seeding by overall win-loss record; tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between (2) seeding by win-loss record in specifi c contests, those two. (3) seeding by a rating/ranking from a statewide poll, (1) In districts that have decided to play each other only once (4) seeding by a majority vote, in district play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The (5) seeding by a committee, team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest (6) seeding a specifi c team(s) into a position to avoid seed (one seed). scheduling complications and issues, and (2) In districts that have decided to play each other twice in (7) seeding by a rating turned in by each school. district play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used shall be: be the records as of midnight Wednesday prior to the Monday a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record of the week of the district tournament. Teams and school in the second game played against all district opponents representatives may meet during the regular season to discuss involved in the tie. tournament operations (i.e. dates, times, sites, tournament 7 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK personnel needs, etc.). However if an organizational meeting e) meet the published site selection criteria for basketball as is held prior to the published date on the calendar, no posted on the KHSAA website. discussions may be held regarding the bracketing or pairings 4) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. of specifi c teams unless all mandated seeded games have Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit been played prior to the meeting. their request through a meeting of the Principals or Designated h) Seeded games unable to be played for any reason (with the Representatives of all schools in the region and shall supply exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published information relating to the listed criteria for hosting. The deadline for seeded games shall be recorded as a win and a Commissioner’s offi ce may use this site selection plan as a loss for both teams in computing seeded position. guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining the sites. i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new 5) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for team into a previously seeded district during the current recommending the region tournament sites and voting shall school year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If include boys’ and girls’ sites and shall include all schools within the new team enters the alignment following the completion a region, not simply the schools playing in a particular year’s of all game contracts and the new team is unable to schedule event. all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the 6) Criteria to be considered by the schools for recommending last position for the current season, and shall be included regional tournament sites include but are not limited to: in seeded game scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a a) satisfactory capacity within the gym to safely accommodate single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; previous school year, the district teams will conduct a new b) A minimum of four dressing rooms if double headers are to vote as to seeding. be played; j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one c) An offi cials dressing room; team into a seeded district, the district teams shall conduct a d) Adequate parking for projected attendance; and new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding e) meet the published site selection criteria for basketball as decision being not seeded. posted on the KHSAA website. k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams 7) In addition, the schools shall agree on the amount of proceeds within a district, the teams in the district shall conduct a new (if any) that is to be kept by the host school as well as limitations vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in on expenses by the host school; determining the fi xed amount the district being not seeded. or percentages to be given to each school that participates; the l) Once a vote has been conducted for the district to be seeded, fi xed amount or percentages to be given to each team in the all required contests shall be considered to be contracted region not competing in the tournament; and the disbursement for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school of any proceeds from commissions, parking, advertising and any representatives do not notify all schools in the district of other revenue related to the tournament but not directly related their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the to ticket, program or novelty sales. contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is not 8) Resolution as to disputes on any of these issues may be specifi ed, a $1000 default forfeiture fee will be assessed for facilitated by the Commissioner’s offi ce and if agreement non-played contests. cannot be reached, may be considered by the Board of Control. II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION 9) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state A) Dates for Play tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, 1) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing on the Memorandum Calendar as local conditions permit. Boys’ facilities, and community/area support. region tournaments shall be completed by Saturday night prior III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS to the boys’ state tournament in years when the boys’ state A) Selection of Tournament Manager and Duties tournament is played fi rst, but may extend to Tuesday before 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of the girls’ state tournament if the boys’ state tournament is the school to serve as the manager for each district tournament. played second. Girls’ region tournaments shall be completed by The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the region the Saturday night prior to the girls’ state tournament in years tournaments. when the girls’ state tournament is played fi rst, but may extend 2) It is the duty of each district and region tournament manager to Tuesday before the boys’ state tournament if the girls’ state to invite representatives of the participating teams in the

CCompetition Rules tournament is played second. tournament to a meeting held for the purpose of making

o m 2) In regions where boys’ and girls’ region tournaments are tournament plans. p assigned to separate sites in different cities, the region 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform

t i tournament manager(s) shall schedule games in order that the the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings /

i o games are not played on the same date at separate sites. In entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according

R regions where boys’ and girls’ region tournaments are assigned to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the

e to the same site, the region manager(s) shall be responsible for tournament if it is not held at the school. s scheduling games in the best interest of all participating schools. 4) It shall be the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, B) Sites for Play basketball, fi eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball 1) District tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection to contact the KHSAA Scoreboard with the fi nal results following plan approved by a 2/3 majority vote of the schools eligible to each contest. This is in addition to fulfi lling local media requests. compete in each district tournament. If a district is unable to The receipts of a tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied resolve confl ict over the plan, the Commissioner shall establish against the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. a plan. 5) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state 2) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will having a schedule of twelve (12) or more basketball games direct a drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct shall be allowed to vote for the district tournament location or the state tournament. participate in the tournament. B) Tournament Meeting 3) Criteria to be considered by the schools for the district 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each tournament include but are not limited to: tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times a) Satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate of the games, and make all other arrangements necessary to past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; conduct the tournament. b) Enough dressing rooms if double headers are to be played; 2) The district meetings shall be held in the school designated as c) An offi cials dressing room; the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the d) Adequate parking for projected attendance; and week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar.

8 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to teams. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, 3) The Region meeting shall be held on Sunday afternoon alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw immediately following the district tournaments not prior to 2:00 to determine the order of draw) or any other method for local time in the school designated as the host. These meetings which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all teams, but not NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. prior to the completion of all district tournament games. The site b) In a region tournament with participants from four districts, for future regional tournaments is not an issue for this meeting the district winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a unless the Principal or the Designated Representative as listed standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up on the KHSAA website is present for all teams in the region (not team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. limited to the competing teams). c) In a region tournament with participants from three districts, C) Tournament Pairings the draw shall be conducted as follows. The format will 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing follow a standard eight-team bracket with two byes, those for each school. falling into positions 2 and 7. The district winners shall draw 2) District (non-seeded): The pairings for the district tournament for positions 1 and 8 in the bracket. The district winner not shall be made in accordance with the following procedure, with drawing a bye shall draw for a position in slots 3 through all byes being arranged to be in the fi rst round: 6. The district runner-up to the district champion drawing for a) The appropriate bracket shall be used for team placement position in slots 3 through 6 will draw into one of the two according to the number of teams entering the tournament: remaining slots in the bracket opposite the district winner, and (1) For three (3) teams, the bracket is seeded by rule and form the remaining two runner-up teams will be placed opposite BR103 shall be used; their corresponding district winners in the remaining two slots (2) For four (4) teams, the unseeded BR104 shall be used; in the bracket. (3) For fi ve (5) teams, the unseeded BR105 shall be used; d) In a region tournament with participants from two districts, (4) For six (6) teams, the unseeded BR106 shall be used; the draw shall be conducted as follows. The district winners (5) For seven (7) teams, the unseeded BR107 shall be used; will draw for positions 1 and 3 in a standard four-team (6) For eight (8) teams, the unseeded BR108 shall be used; bracket. Each corresponding runner-up team will be placed in (7) If more than eight (8) teams are in the district bracket, the position in the opposite bracket from the district winner. contact the KHSAA offi ces for assistance in utilizing the e) In regions where the drawing of district boundaries result in unseeded BR116 bracket. two or three districts, the Board of Control may approve an b) The participants may determine the order in which the alternate format in order to allow for a full eight-team bracket bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to in the region tournament. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, f) The winner of each region tournament shall advance to the alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw state tournament. to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 5) State. The Commissioner shall conduct a blind draw to which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may determine the pairings for the state tournament. The winner of NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. each of the sixteen (16) region tournaments shall advance to the c) The participants shall then draw for the non-BYE positions state tournament. in the bracket. For example, in a fi ve team bracket, the draw 6) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing teams, shall be for positions 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. any bracket not drawn in accordance with the above procedures d) The home team shall be determined by the bracket form. may be directed to be corrected, including the replay of contests, e) The games of the tournament shall be played in the order by the Commissioner’s offi ce. listed on the bracket unless unanimous agreement is reached IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS among the competing teams due to facility logistics concerns. A) Roster Requirement f) The district champion and the runner-up of each single 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on elimination tournament shall advance to the region the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its tournament. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. 3) District (seeded): After seeding positions have been determined, 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall shall serve all roster purposes in these rules.

CCompetition Rules be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single 3) On the ﬁ rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked

o m elimination bracket. The brackets (from top down) are as follows: so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised p a) 2 Team - The district tournament shall then be a single game, following this date, thereby creating the ﬁ nal eligibility list for

t i with the winner being advanced to the region tournament as tournament play.

i o the district winner (regardless of the regular season results). 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a

R b) 3 Teams (seeded by rule) – Seed 2 plays 3, Seed 1 plays documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner.

u l winner of Seed 2 vs. Seed 3 for championship. e B) Withdrawal after draw s c) 4 Teams - Seed 1 plays 4, 2 plays 3, winners meet for 1) No school which enters a district, region or state tournament championship. (draws for place) shall withdraw from the tournament or forfeit d) 5 Teams - Seed 5 plays 4, 1 plays winner of 5 vs. 4, 2 plays 3, any of its games, but shall play its entire tournament schedule. remaining winners meet for championship. 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region or state tournament e) 6 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of 4 vs. at any time following the draw for district tournament positions 5, 2 plays winner of 3 vs. 6, remaining winners meet for or after the pairings have been determined in a seeded district, championship. that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. f) 7 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of C) Photo Requirement 4 vs. 5, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, remaining winners Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in meet for championship. compliance with published deadlines and directives. g) 8 Teams - Seed 1 plays 8, 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 vs. 8 D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions winner plays 4 vs. 5 winner, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, 1) A school may enter a team composed of fi fteen (15) players in remaining winners meet for championship. each postseason tournament game from the roster submitted h) The district champion and the runner-up of each single online. elimination tournament shall advance to the region 2) The fi fteen (15) players shall be designated each game, and no tournament. other players may be in uniform and tournament management 4) Region: The pairings for the region tournament shall be made in may limit the total number of individuals on the benches. accordance to the following procedure. E) Minimum Number of Contests a) The participants may determine the order in which the To be eligible to compete in the district, region or state tournament,

9 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK a member school team shall have competed in at least twelve 2) The champion of each state tournament will be the team games during the regular season. undefeated in a single elimination tournament. V) OFFICIALS B) Trophies and Awards A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal winner and runner-up. Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published gate receipts of that tournament. guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason shall receive a trophy and thirty-three (33) individual medals. contests shall be: 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, including a Most Valuable Player. meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state every four years to be eligible for the four years following the tournament. training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the VII) FINANCES, PASSES KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison A) District and Region Finances in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan for state and regional play in the sports in which such training that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; payment made by teams to help offset event costs. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary Commission; trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the makeup clinic; tournament should be allowed. 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or region Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament as properly attending; that are approved by the participating teams. 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for offi cials within a particular sport; and game offi cials and trophies. 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 d) The remainder of the profi t shall be divided among the schools offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than participating in the tournament and the non-participating the published late deadline for licensing year. schools in accordance with previously approved plans. D) Offi cials assigned to postseason basketball tournaments shall e) The host school should be allowed the profi ts made on meet the following criteria: programs, concessions, parking, etc. 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored state championship B) State competition shall be assigned by the Commission; 1) The Association will fi nance state tournament. The following 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the allowances will apply if the receipts from the tournament make district, regional or state tournaments; them justifi able, otherwise, the Board of Control will determine 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason the allowance. assignments to district, region, and state tournament contests 2) Expenses will be paid for meals, lodging and travel for each through the Assigning Secretary. The fi nal selection shall be team through breakfast on the day following elimination from made by the Commission; the tournament for each team. 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system 3) The state tournament squad for purposes of reimbursement

CCompetition Rules approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least shall be limited to thirty-three (33) persons, including the

o m two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The principal, coaches, team members, cheerleaders, cheer sponsor p recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season and other personnel.

t i evaluations; 4) Schools failing to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the

i o 5) The resultant rankings of ofﬁ cials (ﬁ nal ranked list of scores) is Association shall forfeit the lodging allowance. Schools within

R public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT forty (40) one-way miles will not be provided a lodging allowance,

e public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; but will be considered commuting teams. Commuting teams s 6) A crew of three (3) offi cials shall be assigned to regular season shall be paid an allowance in accordance with pre-tournament and postseason varsity play; instructions. 7) To be eligible to offi ciate postseason in boys’ basketball, an 5) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per offi cial shall offi ciate at least eight (8) high school boys’ games, mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of and eight (8) high school girls’ games; $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. 8) To be eligible to offi ciate postseason in girls’ basketball, an 6) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School offi cial shall offi ciate at least eight (8) high school girls’ games; Athletic Association shall retain profi ts from each state 9) Beginning with postseason play in 2021, offi cials desiring to be tournament. assigned to the Region and State Tournaments shall have within C) Passes/Tickets the preceding four years, attended the Basketball Advance 1) Each participating school shall be allowed passes for one coach Offi cials Camp; and and principal to the district and region tournament. 10) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play. 2) Each member school of the Association may, upon application 11) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at by the principal, purchase up to four priority tickets to the boys’ the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved and girls’ state tournaments for use by school personnel. Each by the Commissioner. superintendent may, upon application, purchase up to two VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS priority tickets to each state basketball tournament. A) Champion 3) The competing teams in the state tournament will be afforded 1) The champion of each district and region tournament will be the passes to accommodate a traveling party of thirty-three (33), team undefeated in a single elimination tournament. to include the school principal(s) and other administrators, the

10 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK coaching staff, the team members (maximum 15) and the off circle. court staff for the team. No additional passes will be issued. d) No players, coaches, team attendants, or anyone associated Cheerleaders from participating schools will be admitted in with the opposing team is to enter or interfere with the uniform to each contest in which their team is participating, opponent’s spirit line. with a maximum of sixteen (16) allowed to participate at any 2) Postseason time. a) In games played on neutral courts, spirit lines will not be VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES allowed onto the courts including the end zones. A) Playing Rules b) The Association will designate warm-up areas for the 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Basketball Rules as postseason games as necessary. published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, governed I) Deadline to Start Contest by State Association adoption provisions in the National Federation No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the Association may be p.m. local time at any contest site. implemented in contests played in Kentucky and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. B) Dimensions of the Tournament Courts and Game Balls 1) The dimensions of the court on which the games will be played will be determined by the size of the court at the designated tournament site. 2) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. C) Music/Sound Effects/Artifi cial Noisemakers 1) Per NFHS Rule 1-18, the playing of music/sound effects shall only be permitted during the pregame, time-outs, intermission and postgame. The use of artifi cial noisemakers shall be prohibited, to include but not be limited to any mechanical device manufactured to create noise and multiple objects which together make noise. Such prohibition shall include the use of equipment such as megaphones when used by anyone of than a cheerleader and for any other purpose than voice ampifi cation. 2) Megaphones are allowed to be used by cheerleaders as long as they are used in the traditional sense. Megaphones are not to be used to bang against the fl oor or wall to incite crowds or intimidate players. Megaphones may not be used by fans as noisemakers. D) Cheerleaders on Court During Timeouts Basketball Rule 5-12-5 deals with the shortened timeout (30-second timeout.). This is not a timeout during which cheerleaders are allowed on the fl oor. During full length timeouts, cheerleaders may be allowed by offi cials to be on the court dependent upon game activity and space limitations. E) Cheerleaders on Court During Free Throw Attempts Cheerleaders may not be in the area between the foul lane lines extended when a free throw is being attemped. F) Coaching Box KHSAA member schools may utilize a coaching box per the NFHS rules drawn 14 feet from the 28’ mark on the court. There is no

CCompetition Rules coaching box beyond the 14’ mark toward the baseline.

o m G) Point Differential Rule p 1) All member schools will utilize a running clock rule at all levels

t i of basketball (freshman, JV, Varsity) when one team is ahead by

i o 35 or more points after halftime.

R 2) The clock shall be stopped only for a charged timeout, an

e injury/blood or disqualifi cation, and immediately following the s reporting of a foul if free throws are to be administered. a) After reporting a shooting foul, the offi cial will signal the timer to stop the clock. This will be signaled by the offi cial to the timer after reporting the foul. b) Once the offi cial signals the timer to stop the clock, it will be started when the free throw ends if the last free throw is missed (when it is certain the try will not be successful or when the try touches the fl oor or any player, 4-20-3), or when the ball is at the disposal of the opponent if the last throw is successful (Available to a player after a goal and the offi cial begins the throw-in count, 4-4-7.) H) Spirit/Pep Line for Introductions, Warm-up Areas 1) Regular Season a) During the regular season, A team’s spirit line is not to extend onto any part of the other team’s half of the court and area leading up to the playing fi eld. b) A team’s half of the court will be designated by NFHS rules. This includes the end zones. c) No spirit line is to extend over past the start of the center

11 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to Governing Cross Country January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already (As Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan. appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the 5) If a region is unable to resolve confl ict over a plan, the implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c Commissioner shall establish a plan. rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) 6) All hosts granted an event shall host at least one meet during the I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS region meet year with at least fi ve schools entering competitors A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play and using the electronic entry and results system. 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor 7) All host courses shall be properly marked per NFHS rules if the postseason competition in cross country for boys and girls, markings are not able to be affi xed to the ground. provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership to 8) The region host school shall own a current license to the participate in said competition. Association designated software application for managing 2) Member schools desiring to participate in KHSAA sponsored region entries and results or shall contract with a current license postseason competition shall notify the Association offi ce prior holder. to September 1. 9) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals 7) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and 8) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled community/area support. on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce, with new III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS schools with a four-year average enrollment of less than 611 A) Selection of Tournament Manager students being placed in Class 1A, 611 to 1050 in Class 2A and 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the above 1050 in Class 3A. region meets, and shall serve as the manager for the state meet. 9) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant managers as website and is updated as information changes as provided by deemed necessary to manage the event. the membership with regard to participation. 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools B) Enrollment and Criteria for Determining Classes participating in the meet as to the time and place of the meet, 1) The classifi cation shall be based on the four-year average total to supply him or her with entry material and instructions, to enrollment of students in grades 9-12 including all special invite their participation, and make all arrangements to conduct education students. the meet. 2) The enrollment of schools enrolling only one gender shall be 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform doubled for classifi cation purposes. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 3) The enrollment data used to determine the class boundaries entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according shall be obtained from the Kentucky Department of Education or to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the other verifi able sources in the case of nonpublic schools. tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a 3) Schools playing up into a higher classifi cation that the four-year tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) average enrollment dictates shall remain that higher class for for failure to comply with these provisions. the duration of the alignment. 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state 4) The state shall be initially divided into three classes based on a meet and may appoint as many assistant managers as deemed four-year average enrollment, with each class containing seven necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will direct (7) regions. all of the business necessary to conduct the state tournament. 5) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic sections IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS within three (3) enrollment based classes with the approval of A) Roster Requirement the Board of Control. 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on 6) For the current four-year alignment period, the schools shall be the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its divided to where approximately 40% of those offering track and online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. fi eld are placed in Class 1A, the next 30% in Class 2A an the 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and

CCompetition Rules shall serve all roster purposes in these rules.

o next 30% in Class 3A. m 7) After the initial division, any schools offering Cross Country 3) On the ﬁ rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked

p e but not offering track are placed in the appropriate class based so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised

t following this date, thereby creating the ﬁ nal eligibility list for

i on comparison of that school’s enrollment, and the largest and o tournament play. n smallest of each class.

R 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a u II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION

l e documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner.

s A) Dates for Play 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control B) Individual Entry Requirements shall determine the dates of the region and state meets. 1) To be eligible to compete in the region or state meet, a 2) All meets shall be held within the dates indicated on the contestant shall be enrolled in the seventh (7th) grade or higher Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the and be otherwise eligible by all KHSAA Bylaws. Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating C) Team Entry and Advancement school representatives. 1) The initial entry report for contestants in the region meet shall 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will be submitted not later than 5:00 p.m. four (4) days prior to the be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. region meet. B) Sites for Play 2) A school may enter a total of ten (10) eligible individuals on a 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region region/state meet entry that must come from the master online meet sites. roster. Entry must be done via the designated electronic software. 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after From that list and only from that list, a school shall designate a consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The maximum of seven (7) runners who may actually compete in the prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to region meet. A school not having enough runners to qualify as seating and parking facilities and such other information as may a team (fi ve (5) runners) may enter less than fi ve (5) runners as be requested by the Commissioner. individual contestants in the region meet. 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection 3) Only in the case of documented medical emergency can these plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining deadlines be waived or a substitution be allowed. the sites. 4) Each manager is responsible for the forwarding of the entries 12 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK for the region meet to all competing teams. made by teams to help offset event costs. D) Advancement to State Meet B) State 1) In regions that have 1 full team enters the Region Meet, 1 team 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. advances. 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors 2) In regions that have 2-3 full teams enter the Region Meet, 2 participating in the state meet. teams advance. VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES 3) In regions that have 4-5 full teams enter the Region Meet, 3 A) Playing Rules teams advance. 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Track and Field 4) In regions that have 6-7 full teams enter the Region Meet, 4 Rules as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional teams advance. rules, governed by State Association adoption provisions in the 5) In regions that have 8-10 full teams enter the Region Meet, 5 National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the teams advance. Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky 6) In regions that have 11 or more full teams enter the Region and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. Meet, 6 teams advance. 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and 7) In addition to the advancing teams the top fi ve (5) individuals participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. not on a qualifying team shall advance from the region to the 3) The Board of Control shall serve as the Games Committee state meet. as designated by the NFHS Track and Field Rules. The Board E) Substitutions shall through its normal procedures, receive input from the 1) Any contestant whose name is on the ten person region/state Commissioner’s Advisory Committee and all other internal entry list may be a member of a qualifying team or declared for opportunities prior to fi nalizing any decision in compliance with the State Meet for a qualifying team these rules. 2) Substitutes for individual qualifi ers in the state meet are not 4) National Federation Track and Field Rule 9 shall govern meets be allowed. in Cross Country where appropriate and in particular where V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS participant safety is ensured. A) Regular Season Competition B) Length and Specifi cations for Course 1) It is strongly recommended that a KHSAA licensed offi cial (Track 1) The course will be approximately 5,000 meters for both boys and Field), be present at each Cross Country meet that counts and girls. All Cross Country races shall be a minimum of 2,500 toward the limit of meets in accordance with Bylaw 23. meters and a maximum of 5,000 meters in order to count toward 2) In any meet where more than four (4) schools are entering the applicable required minimum number of meets. teams or individuals, there shall be a KHSAA licensed Track 2) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards offi cial. for cross country courses to be used in postseason may be B) Postseason Competition developed by Association staff and Advisory Committees and 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition approved by the Board of Control. shall be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the C) Interrupted Races Federal Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007) and within the 1) When lightning or other inclement weather, heat and humidity published guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. conditions or other events beyond the control of meet 2) The local management of the postseason cross country meets management cause the interruption of a race by the Meet shall have the authority to hire and utilize all licensed offi cials Referee after it has begun, it shall be considered to be complete necessary for properly conducting the meets. with respect to the counting against the maximum number of VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS meets for a school or minimum number of required meets for A) Champion an athlete. 1) All entrants from a school accumulate team points toward the 2) Any race so interrupted shall be complete to the extent of the team championship. compensation for meet offi cials. 2) A team, for scoring purposes in determining the team champion, D) Starter’s Pistol Specifi cations shall consist of a minimum of fi ve (5) participating members. The starter’s pistol, which shall be a .32 caliber (.22 for indoor 3) The team score shall be determined by totaling the places of the track), shall meet all district, local, state and federal regulations fi rst fi ve fi nishing contestants on each team. The scores of the including possession ordinances and registration requirements. individual contestants, those not on a team, shall be disregarded E) Uniform allowances per NFHS Track Rule 3

CCompetition Rules in computing the team score. 1) All contestants in Cross Country shall adhere to National

o m 4) The champion of each meet will be the team compiling Federation Rule 4-3 as it relates to the uniform of the competitors. p In addition, the Games Committee for the State Cross Country e the lowest total team score, with teams with less than ﬁ ve

t i and Track Meets may, within the allowable limits of Rule 4-3, t contestants disregarded in the team competition.

i o B) Trophies and Awards establish clariﬁ cations and enhancements to the uniform

R 1) Trophies will be awarded to the teams ﬁ nishing ﬁ rst and second requirement to ensure equal treatment of all competitors.

l e at the region meets. 2) The following areas have been addressed for consistent s 2) The fi rst eight (8) runners fi nishing will receive awards at the enforcement by meet offi cials and which are applicable to region meet. all contestants. NOTHING ABOUT THESE RULES MANDATE A 3) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the REQUIRED COLOR: gate receipts of that meet. a) HEADS - Hats are not allowed however the toboggan or 4) Trophies will be awarded to the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, stocking cap/wrap are permitted in cold or hot weather. All third and fourth at the state meet. head gear and holders shall be checked by the Meet Referee 5) The ten (10) individuals on the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, to make sure they are secure. Anything worn on the head third and fourth will receive awards at the state meet, shall be secure, designed for the head, and without a visible 6) The fi rst fi fteen (15) runners fi nishing in each race will receive manufacturer’s logo or other decoration (other than the awards at the state meet. school name / nickname). 7) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals b) TOPS - If shirts are worn under the school issued jersey by at the state meet. more than one team member (two or more), that apparel VII) FINANCES, PASSES shall be exactly the same single solid color on all who choose A) Region to wear the undergarments. It is not necessary that all team 1) The fi nances of the region meet will be managed at the region members wear them. No lettering or designs or decals will level. be allowed on undershirts anywhere with the exception of 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of a single manufacturer’s logo which shall adhere to the NFHS net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to restrictions. The restrictions on undershirts do not include any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment sleeve length. For example one team member can wear long

13 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK sleeves, one 3/4 sleeves and one short sleeves as long as they are the same solid color. c) BOTTOMS - If leotards, body suits or bike shorts are worn under the school issued running trunks by more than one team member (two or more), that apparel shall be a single solid color and alike in color. Long underwear will not be accepted as a visible undergarment for either tops or bottoms. No lettering, designs or decals will be allowed on underpants anywhere, with the exception of a single manufacturer’s logo which shall meet NFHS restrictions. The restrictions on pants do not include pants length. For example one team member can wear long pants, one 3/4 pants and one short pants as long as they are the same solid color. d) UNIFORM VIOLATIONS - If a uniform violation is not detected prior to the start of an event, there can be no disqualiﬁ cation for violations. e) HANDS - Gloves or socks may be worn on the hands during cold weather. f) FEET - Shoes shall be worn. Shoes of different runners on the team do not have to be the same make and model. The use of ballet slippers, gymnastic or sweat socks does not meet the requirements of this rule. g) JEWELRY – There are no restrictions on jewelry worn during meets. h) BODY MARKINGS / TATTOOS - A permanent tattoo that is not objectionable in the judgement of an ofﬁ cial, would be allowed. A permanent tattoo that is objectionable in its content or form shall be covered. Anything non permanent including tattoos, face paint, etc. would not be legal if visible on any part of the body as it would be excessive body decoration. i) SPORTS BRA – These items are considered foundation garments and are not to be considered as part of the uniform or undergarment rule. j) SUNGLASSES- Unless prescribed by a medical doctor for the purpose of vision correction, sunglasses may not be worn during competition. F) Heat Index All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA.

CCompetition Rules

14 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES involved in the tie. Governing Field Hockey c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to breaker. the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c shall be the next tie-breaker. rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor seed (one seed) postseason competition in fi eld hockey for girls, provided f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is would be uniform for all three-team regions. approved by the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for sections with the approval of the Board of Control. tie-breaking purposes. 3) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For region tournaments with four or more teams, the region on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 4) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the region is required in order B) Region Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For region tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the regions shall only two teams enter the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a region with a) The head to head results from the regular season shall four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number 1 seed for postseason a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including play. (Wording for Seeded vs. Non-Seeded) ...tiebreaking all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the ...blind draw….are we saying #1 or schools vote (wording) participating teams in the region and the manager shall b) The number 1 seed shall host the region tournament and record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. shall be the designated home team, even if unable to host The representatives making the written declaration shall the game at their home site due to facility requirements in decide all issues related to seeding, the sport. b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of 2) For region tournaments with three teams, the region tournament the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided shall be seeded in accordance with the following three-team to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote seeding rules: of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding a) The competing teams within a region shall, by majority vote, decisions. Such changes to the region seeding plan may not determine if the schools are required to play each other once be made for the current year once play has begun in the or twice during the regular season. These games will produce regular season. a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the regions. KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of the region tournament, and advances to the championship the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded game. position. c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of e) It shall be the region tournament manager’s responsibility the region tournament with the loser of that game being to update the Association with respect to any changes to eliminated. the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant d) In the case of a two-way tie for the region winning position, tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall be: with, and written verifi cation and documentation from, prior

CCompetition Rules year tournament managers, will be utilized by staff to assist

o (1) In regions that have decided to play each other only once m in region play, the winner in the game played between the with interpretation and clariﬁ cation. p f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once e tied region opponents would have the higher ﬁ nishing

t i the determination has been made to seed. A recommended

i position. o point system for seeded region play has been adopted by n (2) In regions that have decided to play each other twice in

R the Board of Control following a recommendation from the u region play, the winner in the second game played between l Commissioner’s Advisory Committee on Field Hockey. e the tied region opponents would have the higher ﬁ nishing

s position. (1) Each team shall play each region opponent at least once e) In the case of a three-way tie for the region winning position, during the regular season. the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of (2) Each team is awarded three (3) points for a win the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the (3) Each team is awarded one (1) point for a tie other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result (4) Each team is awarded zero (0) points for loss in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (5) The team that has the highest point total will be awarded tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between the number one (1) seed. The team with the second highest those two. point total will be the number two seed. The team with the (1) In regions that have decided to play each other only once third highest point total will be the number three seed. The in region play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The team with the fourth highest point total will be the fourth team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest seed. The team with the fi fth highest point total will be the seed (one seed). fi fth seed. Etc. (2) In regions that have decided to play each other twice in (6) Tie breaker Procedures region play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall be: a. In the event of a two way tie after point calculations a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record and each team plays each other once, the winner of the in the second game played against all region opponents regular season contest will be the higher seed in the involved in the tie. tournament bracket. b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record b. In the event of a two way tie after point calculations and in the fi rst game played against all region opponents 15 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK region teams choose to play each other more than once, to seating and parking facilities and such other information as the winner of the last game will be awarded the higher may be requested by the Commissioner. The Commissioner’s seed. offi ce may use this site selection plan as a guide, but is not c. In the event there are multiple ties, a region could choose bound by this plan in determining the sites. an alternative method for determining the highest seed. 5) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for d. a blind draw would determine the higher seed winner recommending the region tournament sites and voting shall e. the team that allowed the fewest goals in region play include all schools within a region, not simply the schools would be awarded the higher seed. playing in a particular year’s event. Criteria to be considered by g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used the schools include but are not limited to- satisfactory capacity shall be the records as of the date of the pre-tournament within the facility to safely accommodate past (fi ve years) and meeting as published on the KHSAA memorandum calendar. expected attendance numbers; an offi cials dressing room; and Teams and school representatives may meet during the adequate parking for projected attendance. In addition, all regular season to discuss tournament operations (i.e. dates, sites shall meet the published site selection criteria baseball as times, sites, tournament personnel needs, etc.). However if posted on the KHSAA website. an organizational meeting is held prior to the published date 6) The schools in the region shall agree on the amount of proceeds on the calendar, no discussions may be held regarding the (if any) that is to be kept by the host school as well as limitations bracketing or pairings of specifi c teams unless all mandated on expenses by the host school; determining the fi xed amount seeded games have been played prior to the meeting. Games or percentages to be given to each school that participates; the played after the published meeting date SHALL NOT factor fi xed amount or percentages to be given to each team in the into the seeded position. region not competing in the tournament; and the disbursement h) Seeded games unable to be played for any reason (with the of any proceeds from commissions, parking, advertising and any exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published other revenue related to the tournament but not directly related date for the region tournament meetings will be recorded as a to ticket, program or novelty sales. Resolution as to disputes on win and a loss for both teams in computing seeded position. any of these issues may be facilitated by the Commissioner’s i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new offi ce and if agreement cannot be reached, may be considered team into a previously seeded region during the current school by the Board of Control. year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If the 7) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state new team enters the alignment following the completion of tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, all game contracts and the new team is unable to schedule and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the facilities, and community/area support. last position for the current season, and shall be included III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS in seeded game scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a A) Selection of Tournament Manager single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of previous school year, the region teams will conduct a new the school to serve as the manager for each region tournament. vote as to seeding. 2) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one region tournaments. team into a seeded region, the region teams shall conduct a 3) It is the duty of each region tournament manager to invite new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding representatives of the participating teams in the tournament to decision being not seeded. a meeting held for the purpose of making tournament plans. k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams 4) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform within a region, the teams in the region shall conduct a new the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according the region being not seeded. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the l) Once a vote has been conducted for the region to be seeded, tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be all required contests shall be considered to be contracted the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball, for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school fi eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact representatives do not notify all schools in the region of the KHSAA Scoreboard with the fi nal results following each their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the contest. This is in addition to fulfi lling local media requests. The

CCompetition Rules contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is not receipts of a tournament can be assessed a ﬁ ne (levied against

o m speciﬁ ed, a $1000 default forfeiture fee will be assessed for the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. p non-played contests. 5) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state

t i II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant

i o A) Dates for Play managers as deemed necessary to manage the event.

R 1) Region tournament play shall begin not later than Monday B) Tournament Meeting

e of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for region tournaments. 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each s Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. of the games, and make all other arrangements necessary to 2) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated conduct the tournament. on the Memorandum Calendar as local conditions permit. Any 2) The region meetings shall be held in the school designated as exceptions shall be approved by the Commissioner. the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the B) Sites for Play week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar. 1) Region tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all plan approved by a unanimous vote of the schools eligible to teams. compete in each region tournament. C) Tournament Pairings 2) If a region is unable to resolve confl ict over the plan, the Board 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing of Control shall establish a plan. for each school in the region tournaments. 3) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to 2) Region (non-seeded). The principal or his/her representative January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, shall shall conduct the drawing for each school. The pairings for be allowed to vote for the region tournament location or the region tournament shall be made in accordance with the participate in the tournament. following procedure, with all byes being arranged to be in the 4) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. fi rst round: Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit a) The number of places to be considered shall be four, eight, their request through the defi ned site selection process at prior sixteen, thirty-two, etc. Of the above numbers, the one that is year tournaments. The applicant shall supply information relating next greater than the number of teams in the drawing shall

16 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK be considered in the drawing. The teams shall be placed in the every four years to be eligible for the four years following the proper position of the appropriate single elimination bracket. training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the b) If the number of teams in the drawing is less than the KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison number of places to be considered, the even number 2 shall in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be be designed as the fi rst bye; the largest even number as the for state and regional play in the sports in which such training second bye; number 4 as the third bye; the next largest even is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level number as the fourth bye; and so on until the number of by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; places not so designated equals the number of teams in the 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during drawing. The places shall be determined by drawing by lot, current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the the numbers assigned to the “byes” having been fi rst taken Commission; from the numbers to be drawn. 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved c) The teams which pair with “byes” shall have a rest period makeup clinic; during the fi rst round of the playing of games in the 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a tournament. sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and d) The winner of the No. 1 and No. 2 games shall play the winner Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these of the No. 3 and No. 4 game. The winner of the No. 5 game four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing and No. 6 game shall play the winner of No. 7 and No. 8 excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences game. The two winners shall play for the championship. The as properly attending; same general procedure shall be used in the case of more 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates than eight places or teams. to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive e) The region champion and the runner-up of each single this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of elimination tournament shall advance to the state tournament. offi cials within a particular sport; and 3) Region (seeded). After seeding positions have been determined, 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single the published late deadline for licensing year. elimination bracket. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS 4) State. The pairings for the state tournament shall be made in A) Champion accordance to the following procedure. 1) The champion of each region tournament will be the team a) In a state tournament with participants from four regions, undefeated in a single elimination tournament. the region winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a 2) The champion of the state tournament will be the winning team standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up in a single elimination tournament. team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. B) Trophies and Awards IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1) Trophies will be given to each region tournament winner and A) Roster Requirement runner-up. 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on 2) The trophies at the region shall be paid from the gate receipts the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its of that tournament. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and shall receive a trophy and twenty-seven (27) individual medals. shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked along with a Most Valuable Player. so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for tournament. tournament play. VII) FINANCES, PASSES 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a A) Region documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. 1) The proceeds of each of the region tournaments shall be used B) Withdrawal after draw to defray the expenses of the participating teams, offi cials, 1) No school which enters a region or state tournament (draws for trophies and other necessary expenses. Net profi t or loss shall place) shall withdraw from the tournament or forfeit any of its be shared based on the revenue distribution plan approved by a

CCompetition Rules games, but shall play its entire tournament schedule. vote of the schools in the classiﬁ cation in accordance with the

o m 2) If a school withdraws from a region or state tournament at KHSAA Constitution. p any time following the draw for region tournament positions or e 2) If no agreement can be reached on payment of expenses for the

t i after the pairings have been determined in a seeded region, that t region tournament, a mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for

i o school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. each necessary trip should be allowed for travel expense and an

R C) Photo Requirement allowance for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to

l e Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in the tournament should be allowed. s compliance with published deadlines and directives. B) State D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. 1) A school may enter a team composed of twenty-four (24) 2) Each participating team will receive an expense allowance for players in each postseason tournament game from the roster twenty-four (24) players and one coach. submitted online. 3) If the Association makes motel/hotel assignments, teams failing 2) The twenty four (24) players shall be designated each game, to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the Association shall and no other players may be in uniform and tournament forfeit their lodging allowance. management may limit the total number of individuals in the 4) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per bench area. mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall VIII) SPECIAL TOURNAMENT AND REGULAR SEASON RULES be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal A) Playing Rules Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Field Hockey Rules B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. governed by State Association adoption provisions in the C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the contests shall be: Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and

17 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. B) Specifi cations of Fields and Game Balls 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards for fi elds to be used in tournament play may be developed by Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the Board of Control. 2) To be eligible to host a region the facility must be equipped with lights that adhere to the KHSAA lighting standards. 3) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. C) Tied games (Regular Season and Postseason) 1) When a game is tied at the end of a regular season contest a 10 minute 7-A-Side Sudden Victory will be played. a) Teams will play with six (6) fi eld players plus a goalkeeper with unlimited substitution during the overtime period and three defenders (3) plus the goalkeeper may be back on corners. b) After a fi ve (5) minute intermission a coin fl ip will be conducted for a passback. c) Teams will keep the same ends of the fi eld as the end of regulation. d) A timeout is only allowed if the team has one left from regulation. 2) If teams are still tied at the end of the sudden victory period, penalty strokes will break the tie. a) A fi ve (5) minute intermission a coin fl ip will be conducted for team to select strokers and an order. b) Five (5) strokers will be chosen from the roster. c) Coaches must turn in a lineup and an order of strokers. d) Subsequent penalty strokes will continue if still tied with the team going fi rst in strokes alternating . e) If score remains tied after fi ve (5) strokers, an additional fi ve (5) minute intermission will be granted and coaches may turn in new strokers and/or a new order of strokers and the procedure repeated. 3) If score remains tied after a second set of fi ve (5) strokers, a set of “sudden victory” strokes shall be taken. a) A fi ve (5) minute intermission a coin fl ip will be conducted for team to select strokers and an order. b) The team stroking fi rst for the fi rst set of penalty strokes shall start the “sudden victory” The team not stroking fi rst in the fi rst set shall start the second set of strokes. c) The strokers and /or order of the strokers may be changed for the second set. e) The fi rst team awarded more goals than the opponent, after an equal number of strokes shall be declared the winner. F) Mercy Rule Provisions 1) If one team has a ten (10) goal lead at the end of the fi rst half

CCompetition Rules or at any point in the second half, the match will be terminated.

m 2) If one team has a ﬁ ve (5) goal lead at any point in the game p the game clock will not stop when additional goals are scored.

t i 3) This rule is to be observed in regular and postseason play.

i o G) Heat Index

R All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For

u l postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager

e s to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA. H) Deadline to Start Contest No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 p.m. local time at any contest site.

18 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES equal enrollments at the dividing point for class division, the Governing Football Board of Control shall determine which teams go into each (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) class. First preference is to use enrollment data at levels other (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to than the top four (4) grades to determine the class boundaries. the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be If the enrollment data does not yield a clear conclusion, the appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the teams going into each class shall be drawn by random chance implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c by drawing by lot or by coin toss. rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) 11) The Board shall give schools, once the ranked enrollments are I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS determined by prior to placement into geographic districts, an A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play opportunity to play to a higher class. Following the receipt of the 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor playing up decisions, the lowest teams in the classes into which postseason competition in football provided that there is teams have played up shall be offered the opportunity to play in suffi cient interest of the membership to participate in said the class the playing up team has vacated, thereby re-drawing competition. the enrollment boundary line. A maximum of three teams from 2) Member schools desiring to participate in KHSAA sponsored the bottom of the class will be offered this opportunity for postseason competition shall notify the Association offi ce prior the slots needed in the lower class due to playing up. As an to September 1. example, if three teams request to play up to Class 3A from 2A, 3) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic sections then a maximum of fi ve teams would be offered the opportunity within six (6) enrollment based classes with the approval of the to play in Class 2A, with the options in ranked order starting Board of Control. with the smallest school, until three have accepted, or fi ve had 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled been offered the opportunity. on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. 12) No other request (than the requests necessitated by playing 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA up) to play into a lower district than the enrollment boundaries website and is updated as information changes as provided by indicate, will be considered. the membership with regard to participation. 13) If at any time during the classifi cation period, a school B) Enrollment and Criteria for Determining Classes for the 2019 withdraws from playoff competition, it shall not be eligible through 2022 playing seasons. to participate in the playoffs until the odd numbered playing 1) The basis for determining the schools to be placed in Class 1A, season. 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A will be the average boys enrollment, 14) Newly added schools will be placed in the alignment on a case including all non-graded special education students, in grades by case basis. 9-12 for the four most recent years available for the entire C) Declaring a District Champion membership at the time of classifi cation (including 2017-2018 1) Class 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5Aand 6A will be divided into two semi- enrollments). states with four regions in each semi-state, and those four 2) Initial classifi cation for the 2019-2022 period is based on regions having two districts in each region. enrollment data verifi ed by the Kentucky Department of 2) To be eligible to be champion, runner-up, third place or fourth Education for the four years through the enrollment of the , place position of a district, a team shall play all other teams 2014-2015, 2015-2016, 2016-2017 and 2017-2018 school assigned to their district. years. 3) The champion, runner-up, third place or fourth place position in 3) The enrollment data used to determine the class boundaries each district shall be determined by the win-loss record based shall be obtained from the Kentucky Department of Education or upon the games played against opponents in the district. Only other verifi able sources in the case of nonpublic schools. games scheduled by contract prior to the fi rst legal playing date 4) The classifi cation shall be for a four-year period, which may be and played before the fi rst weekend of the state playoffs shall extended by the Board of Control. be used in determining a district winner or runner-up. 5) The alignment will be reviewed upon receipt of the 2019- a) TIE-BREAKER (two teams). In the case of a tie for the 2020 school year enrollment information from the Kentucky champion, runner-up, third place or fourth place position Department of Education for possible adjustment to begin with between two teams based upon the win-loss record, the team the 2021 playing season. that won the game contested between the two tied teams 6) In order to be considered for adjustment, the four-year average shall be declared the winner.

CCompetition Rules b) TIE-BREAKER (more than two teams). Should three or more

o enrollment (including 2019-20) would have to be within the m boundaries of another class, and the school shall have had at teams tie for the a district position based upon the win-loss p record, the position shall be determined by the following: e least a 10% change in four year average enrollment during the

t i i) If one of the teams has defeated each of the other teams

i two-year period. o tied in games contested between them, that team shall be n 5) The schools shall be placed in enrollment ranked order (by boys

R declared to hold the highest position, and the winner of the u four grade enrollments, after doubling the enrollment for single- l game between the remaining teams (if less than four) shall e sex schools).

s 6) The minimum number of teams necessary for a full bracket in be declared the second highest position. In the event of the playoff system (32 teams) shall be placed in the highest more than three teams being tied, where one has defeated class (6A) and the lowest enrolment class (1A). The remaining each of the tied teams, that team shall be declared the schools shall then be placed into approximately equal divisions highest position, and the tie-breaking procedure shall be in classes 2A through 5A. re-applied for the remaining tied teams. 7) The Board shall attempt to ensure that districts do not fall ii) If the tie remains, each team tied for the position shall below four (4) teams and that travel distance is the primary receive one point for each game won by any four of their determinant in both alignment decisions, and decisions defeated opponents in all games, except for the games involving playoff pairings. played between any two of the tied teams. All games played 8) The highest and lowest enrollment average from each class shall be counted in applying the tie-breaking procedure, shall form the bounds of the class for the purpose of making including out of state games, with the exception that a adjustments after two years or for adding new teams. defeated school may be counted only once in the procedure 9) If there are an odd number of schools or the number of schools regardless of the number of games played against that is not evenly divisible by the number of classes, the extra teams particular school. Teams awarded forfeit victories (whether shall be placed from the lowest class fi rst, up to the highest or not a forfeit fee is paid) may count the defeated class. For example, if there were 154 teams to divide into the opponents of the forfeiting team, provided the game was middle four (4) classes, there would be 39 in 4A and 5A, and not replaced on the schedule. 38 in 2A and 3A. iii) If the tie remains after application of provision (ii), an 10) If the ranking and division leaves two or more teams with additional defeated opponent’s wins will be added to the 19 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK point total for each team until the tie is broken and the after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall winner of the tied position declared, or until all games are be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and exhausted. community/area support. iv) If the tie for the position involves only three teams, and the III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS AND PAIRINGS application of (ii) and (iii) results in one team being declared A) Manager the winner of the tied position based on point totals, the 1) The Principal of the home school or his/her designee shall highest point total from the application of (ii) and (iii) serve as the manager for each game of the football playoffs between the two remaining tied teams shall be declared to with the exception of the fi nal game in each class, and shall hold the next position. be responsible for ensuring that the game arrangements are v) If the tie for the championship involves more than three complete. teams, and the application of (ii) and (iii) results in one 2) The principals of the competing schools, or their representatives team being declared the winner of the tied position based shall agree on all matters pertaining to the game, including on point totals, the procedure shall then be re-applied to but not limited to, date and starting time, admission charges, determine the next position. expenses, and allocation of reserved seat tickets for the game. vi) If the tie for the position involves more than three teams, Disagreement on any of these items shall be referred to the and the application of (ii) and (iii) results in two teams Commissioner, whose decision in the matter shall be fi nal. remaining tied for the position based on points, the head 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform to head game played between them shall break the tie, and the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / head to head competition will break any remaining ties. entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according vii) If a tie results after application of all provisions of the to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the above plan, the tie shall be broken by the Commissioner. tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball, A) Dates for Play fi eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact 1) Playoff competition will begin on the Friday or Saturday three the KHSAA Scoreboard with the fi nal results following each weeks prior to Thanksgiving Day. contest. This is in addition to fulfi lling local media requests. The 2) All playoff contests shall be held on Friday unless there exists receipts of a tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against a mutual agreement between the schools to hold the game on the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. another day due to fi eld conditions or availability, availability of 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state offi cials, or in the mutual best interests of the competing teams. football playoff fi nals and shall handle all arrangements for B) Sites for Play the games. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant 1) All playoff contests shall be played at sites that meet any managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. adopted required fi eld standards approved by the Board of B) Tournament Pairings Control. 1) The top four teams as determined by intra-district records 2) The fi rst place team from the paired districts on the cross bracket after all tie breakers have been applied will qualify for the chart (see Section III of the Competition Rules) shall serve as the championship playoffs. The fi nishing position within the Region host school for the fi rst round game against the fourth place shall hereinafter be referred to as the “seeded position”. team from the paired district, the second place team from the 2) For the 2019 through 2022 seasons, the playoffs shall bracketed paired districts on the cross bracket chart shall serve as the host within district with the 1st place team hosting the 4th place school for the third place team from the paired district. team and the 2nd place team hosting the 3rd place team during 3) In the second round the winner of the game between fi rst the fi rst two playoff rounds. and fourth place cross bracketed teams will play the winner of 3) For the third round, in games involving remaining teams from the game between the second and third place cross bracketed Districts 1-4, the pairings shall be set with the highest ranked teams. team according to the KHSAA RPI hosting the 4th ranked team 4) All other districts will use the same playoff pattern. and the 2nd highest ranked team hosting the 3rd highest ranked 5) In all games in the second round, the team with the highest team. seeded position (fi nishing position in the district) shall serve as 4) For the third round, in games involving remaining teams from the host school for the game. Districts 5-8, the pairings shall be set with the highest ranked 5) The highest seed (fi nishing position in the district) shall serve team according to the KHSAA RPI hosting the 4th ranked team

CCompetition Rules as the host school the region championship game (third round). and the 2nd highest ranked team hosting the 3rd highest ranked

o m 6) Should teams with the same seeding meet in the third round, team. p the team representing the even-numbered District shall serve e 5) For the fourth round, in games the pairings shall be set with the

t i as the host school the games in even-numbered years, while t highest ranked team according to the KHSAA RPI hosting the

i o the team representing the odd-numbered District shall host the n 4th ranked team and the 2nd highest ranked team hosting the

R game in odd-numbered years. If the paired districts are both 3rd highest ranked team.

l e even or both odd, the highest numbered district shall host the 6) For the fi nals, the highest ranked team according to the KHSAA s game in even numbered years and the lowest numbered district RPI shall be designated as the home team. shall serve as the host school for the game in odd numbered IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS years. A) Roster Requirement 7) For the semi-state round (fourth round), the champion of 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on region 1 will play the champion of Region 2 while the champion the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its of Region 3 will play the champion of Region 4. The team online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. representing the even-numbered Region shall serve as the host 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and school for the games in even-numbered years, while the team shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. representing the odd-numbered Region shall serve as the host 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked school for the game in odd-numbered years. so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised 8) Winners of the fourth round games will play for the class following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for championships. tournament play. 9) The Board of Control may review and consider for revision, the 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a playoff pairings at any time during the alignment period. documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. 10) The site of all games during the fi rst four rounds in all classes B) Withdrawal after draw shall be determined by the designated home team. The Board of 1) No school which enters a district, region or state tournament Control may review and consider this provision for revision at (draws for place or is placed into bracket via results) shall any time during the alignment period. withdraw from the tournament or forfeit any of its games, but 11) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals shall play its entire tournament schedule.

20 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region or state tournament round varsity playoff contests based on the discretion of the at any time following the draw for district tournament positions participating teams and provided availability from the assigned or after the pairings have been determined in a seeded district, association. that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. 8) A crew of seven (7) offi cials shall be assigned to all varsity C) Photo Requirement playoff contests following the fi rst round. Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in 9) Postseason crew assignments shall not come from the local compliance with published deadlines and directives. association of either participating team. D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions 10) To be eligible to offi ciate postseason rounds three through 1) A school may enter a team composed of an unlimited number fi ve, an offi cial shall offi ciate at least eight (8) varsity games at of players in each postseason tournament game from the roster the position to be worked in postseason, with linesman and line submitted online. judge being counted as the same position. 2) Tournament management may limit the total number of 11) Assignments, by local association, will be made by the individuals on the sideline due to risk management concerns. Commission for the fi rst four-rounds of the playoffs, with the E) Minimum Number of Contests exception that the Commission will assign the championship To be eligible to compete in postseason competition, a member crews as a unit to a second, third or fourth-round game. school team shall have competed in games against all teams in a 12) To offi ciate in rounds 3 through 5, an offi cial must work either district during the regular season. round 1 or 2. V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 13) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play. A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall 14) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). by the Commissioner. B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. A) Champion C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason 1) The champion of each district in each class will be the team contests shall be: fi nishing fi rst in the regular season district play. 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, 2) The champion of each region in each class will be the winner of meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once the games duing the third playoff round. every four years to be eligible for the four years following the 3) The champions of each semi-state in each class will be the training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the winner of the games during the fourth playoff round. KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison 4) The champion of each class shall be the winner of the game in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be played in the fi nal game for state and regional play in the sports in which such training B) Trophies and Awards is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; winner and runner-up. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the gate receipts. Commission; 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved shall receive a trophy and fi fty-nine (59) individual medals. makeup clinic; 4) A Most Valuable Player will be selected each championship 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a game. sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these tournament. four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing VII) FINANCES AND PASSES excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences A) FIRST, SECOND, THIRD and FOURTH ROUND as properly attending; 1) The proceeds of all playoff games, with the exception of the 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates fi nal game in each class, will be used to defray the expenses to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive of the visiting team, offi cials, trophies, and other necessary this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of expenses. All gross receipts prior to any distribution shall

CCompetition Rules ofﬁ cials within a particular sport; and include any applicable advance payment made by teams to help

o m 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 offset event costs. p ofﬁ cial, those sports ofﬁ cials shall have licensed no later than e 2) If no agreement can be reached on lodging, meal, and travel

t i the published late deadline for licensing year. t expenses, it is recommended that the gross gate be divided

i o D) Postseason Football Ofﬁ cials shall meet the following additional evenly between the teams after the payment of ofﬁ cials and

R criteria: trophies. This encourages the visiting team to minimize the

l e 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored state championship travel expenses and the home team to control game costs and s competition shall be assigned by the Commission. eliminates the perception of infl ated costs by either the traveling 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the fi nal team or home management. four rounds of the state football playoffs. Exceptions may be 3) There shall be no allowable expense for fi eld or facility rental approved by the Commission. unless such can be documented by the payment of rental to 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason an outside entity. If such allowable expense is to be paid, the assignments to playoff contests. The fi nal selection shall be amount shall be the exact amount paid to the outside entity. made by the Commission through the Assigning Secretary. 4) If no other agreement can be reached, using the state expense 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system allowance is recommended. For the third and fourth round, approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least schools are encouraged to consider a mileage allowance to be two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The paid to the visitors prior to the gate split due to the potential of recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season substantial travel distances involved. evaluations. B) STATE FINALS 5) The resultant rankings of offi cials (fi nal ranked list of scores) is 1) The Association will fi nance the fi nal game in each class. public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT Expenses for lodging and meals and an allowance for team public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; travel will be paid to each participating school. The squad for 6) A crew of fi ve (5) offi cials shall be assigned to all varsity regular expense reimbursement purposes shall be limited to fi fty-nine season contests. (59) persons, including the principal, coaches, team members, 7) A crew of fi ve (5) or (7) offi cials shall be assigned to the fi rst cheerleaders, cheer sponsor and other personnel. 2) Schools failing to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the

21 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK Association shall forfeit the lodging allowance. Schools within clock shall start on the ready for play. Following a 6-point forty (40) one-way miles will not be provided a lodging allowance, touchdown, the clock shall remain stopped for the PAT, but but will be considered commuting teams. Commuting teams shall resume on the ready for play for the ensuing kickoff, shall be paid an allowance in accordance with pre-tournament c) The clock SHALL STOP when an offi cial’s timeout is called instructions. as in the following specifi c 3-5-7 occurrences, and shall 3) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per subsequently start on the SNAP: mile (round trip) for two vehicles, $5 per meal per person, and a (1) For unusual heat or humidity which may create a health maximum of $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. risk to the players, 4) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School (2) For an approved TV/radio timeout, Athletic Association shall retain profi ts from each state (3) A charged timeout is called, tournament. (4) At the end of a period 5) At the state fi nals, only a squad of fi fty-nine (59) persons, (5) The clock shall NOT stop when an offi cial’s timeout is including all support personnel shall be included in the expense called as in the following specifi c 3-5-7 occurrences: reimbursement. Cheerleaders from participating schools will be (6) When a fi rst down is declared, admitted in uniform to each contest. (7) Following a change of team possession, VIII) SPORTS SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES (8) To dry or change the game ball. A) Playing Rules 2) The use of this rule does not preclude the use of NFHS Rule 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Football Rules 3-1-3 that reads: “A period or periods may be shortened in as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, any emergency by agreement of the opposing coaches and the governed by State Association adoption provisions in the referee. By mutual agreement of the opposing coaches and the National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the referee, any remaining periods may be shortened at any time or Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky the game terminated.” and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. G) Interrupted Regular Season Games 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and 1) Refer to NFHS Playing Rule 3-1-4 as KHSAA has authority to participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. determine the procedure for a game ending. The following B) Tied Games procedure is adopted in accordance with that rule. If the score is tied at the end of any game, it will be broken in 2) If a game is interrupted PRIOR to the completion of the fi rst accordance with the National Federation 10-yard tie-breaking half, the following options exist- procedure enumerated in the Football Rules Book. a) Mutually agree to terminate game with score as it exists if C) Choice of Ends of Field and Use of Field in Warm-ups mutually agreed by both teams; 1) The visiting team shall have the choice as to the end of the fi eld b) Mutually agree to resume the game at the point of interruption on which they want to warm up. on a specifi c mutually agreed date and time, a decision that 2) No warm-up activity by either team may extend past the 45- shall be fi nalized at the site prior to team departure. yard line (in the direction of the 50-yard line). c) Mutually agree to declare the result of the game as a 0-0 tie, 3) During pre-game warm-up activity, not team may be beyond and the game cannot be replaced by either team. its own 45 yard line and the mid-fi eld area must remain vacant. d) If neither (a), (b) nor (c) are mutually agreed to, the teams Unsporting activity between the 45-yard lines will be penalized shall resume the game on the following calendar day, unless by the contest offi cials, and if not penalized by the offi cials, may there exists published, written Board of Education policies be penalized by the Association in accordance with Bylaw 27 as that prohibit such play, in which case it shall be played the a violation of Bylaw 15. following day. If one school fails to abide by (d) and there has D) Offi cials Jurisdiction not been a mutual agreement to (a), (b) or (c), the game shall Game offi cials shall assume jurisdiction over the contest one hour be declared a forfeiture by the Commissioner for the purpose before time for the game. of records and standings. E) Specifi cations of Fields and Game Balls 3) If a game is interrupted AFTER the completion of the fi rst half 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards and cannot be resumed, the following options exist- for fi elds to be used in tournament play may be developed by a) Mutually agree to terminate game with score as it exists if Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the mutually agreed by both teams; Board of Control. b) Mutually agree to resume the game at the point of interruption

CCompetition Rules 2) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a on a speciﬁ c mutually agreed date and time, a decision which

o m ball in tournament play to a speciﬁ c brand or model. shall be ﬁ nalized at the site prior to team departure. p F) Running Clock Provisions c) If (a) and (b) above are not mutually agreed to, the teams

t i 1) The Association shall utilize provisions of the National shall resume the game on the following calendar day, unless

i o Federation playing rules which allow for the clock to continue exists published, written Board of Education policies prohibit

R running (with the exception of a charged timeout) when the such play, in which case it shall be played the following day.

u l d) If neither (a) nor (b) are mutually agreed to, and provision (c) e score reaches a 36-point differential in any contest. s a) Any time the score differential reaches 36 points or more, the is implemented, if one school fails to abide by (c), the game following changes will be made regarding rules determining shall be declared a forfeiture by the Commissioner for the when the clock will be stopped or started. The clock shall purpose of records and standings. continue to run from the point that the differential occurs 4) With respect to the game offi cials, if a game is interrupted (without regard to a later return to less than the differential) a) Same crew of offi cials is expected to return to complete with the following clarifi cations: contest b) The clock SHALL STOP when an offi cial’s timeout is called b) Substitute offi cials shall be paid the local policy board as in the following specifi c 3-5-7 occurrences, and shall mileage add-on only subsequently start on the READY FOR PLAY signal: c) Local associations shall develop policy on compensation of (1) For measurement of a possible fi rst down, substitute offi cials, such as pooling game fees, etc. (2) When captains and coaches are notifi ed of the time d) Offi cials have no say in the postponement decisions, except remaining, to moderate discussion. (3) For a player who appears to be injured, e) Offi cials and coaches should involve not solely coaches, but (4) For a player in need of equipment repair, school administrators in the decision. (5) When a coach-referee conference occurs, f) All involved shall remember that this situation is caused by (6) After a foul, to administer a penalty, elements such as weather that are uncontrollable by anyone, (7) For any unusual delay in getting the ball ready to play, and keep the discussions in that perspective.. (8) Following the try, successful FG or safety., H) Videotaping Standard and Procedures and Video Exchange Policy: (9) A score occurs. Following a try, fi eld goal, or safety, the 1) All Visiting teams will be given the same area to record from as

22 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK the home team. be used. The offi cials, absent a clock malfunction, may not order 2) All exchange video should be recorded digitally with a digital the play clock not to be used. Camera. 3. During the playoffs, if a host school has a twenty-fi ve second 3) All exchange video should be recorded in DVD format or Online clock on both ends of the playing fi eld and both are operable, 4) All exchange video shall be recorded using a Tripod. they are to be used. 5) All exchange video shall be recorded from the highest possible 4) During the playoffs, if a host school has a twenty-fi ve second point in the stadium clock at only one end of the fi eld, the clock shall not be used. 6) All exchange video shall be recorded so that the teams numbers 5) The 25-second fi eld clocks are the offi cial delay of game are visible timepieces. 7) All exchange video shall be recorded from the huddle to z few 6) The 25-second clock operator will work under the supervision of seconds past the end of the play (5-10 seconds). the BJ and will report to him before the game for instructions in 8) If the team is a no huddle team, the video shall begin recording or near the offi cials’ dressing room. before any shifts or motions and continue past the end of the 7) The 25 Second Clock Operator will be instructed to: play (5-10 seconds). a) Set the clock display to 25 seconds before the game starts. 9) If there is a penalty, the video shall continue to record until the b) Start 25-second clock on the Referee’s Ready-for-Play signal penalty has been enforced. or Wind-the-Clock signal, whichever comes fi rst. 10) All exchange video shall be recorded from the deepest c) Leave display at ‘00’ seconds if there is a delay of game offensive back to the safety to begin the play, then zooming in penalty called until Referee has completed his signals to the closer to the play in order to see the numbers on the players as press box after enforcing the delay of game penalty. the play progresses. d) Reset display immediately to 25 seconds when ball is put in 11) On all Punts and Punt returns, the video should NOT follow play (snapped) if there is no delay foul called. the ball. The video should begin with a wide view showing both e) Reset display to 25 seconds anytime Referee interrupts the punt and punt return teams, and then zoom in to the return 25-second count and gives the reset signal (palm up with team after the ball is punted and received. pumping arm motion). 12) On all Kickoffs and Kick Returns, the video should NOT follow f) Turn off both displays should either 25 second clock the ball. The video should begin with a wide view of both the malfunction or become inoperative. Both 25- second clocks kickoff and return teams and then zoom in to the return team will not operate again until the problem is corrected and both after the returner has received the ball. 25-second clocks are working. Both coaches will be notifi ed 13) The video shall show the down and distance with a short shot immediately if the 25-second clock is no longer offi cial. The of the downs marker between plays. 25-second count will then be kept on the fi eld by the BJ on his 14) The video shall show the scoreboard after every score, at each watch. When doing this, BJ raises his hand when 10 seconds timeout, and between quarters. remain in the 25-second count. 15) All teams shall make available at least 2 tapes to exchange g) Do not use 25-second clock when less than 25 seconds remain (choice made by the opponent) in any period if the game clock IS running. If 25-second clock 16) All teams shall exchange an updated roster, clearly indicating is mistakenly started in this situation, DO NOT stop game offensive and defensive starters. or game clock to correct. If the game clock is not running 17) All Video shall be available by 8 am on the day following when less than 25 seconds remaining in any period, then the the game if online exchange is utilized, or by noon on the day 25-second clock is used. following the game if there is a physical exchange of video. h) NOTE: If the 25-second clock is erroneously started, it shall I) Location of Home Team / Fans be stopped immediately. The BJ may be asked to help the 1) It is a home game management decision as to which side of Referee determine the amount of time lost when the clock is the fi eld is designated for home team fans and which side is stopped for reasons beyond the circumstances of either team. designated for visiting team fans. The amount of time run off the 25-second clock can be used 2) The home team benches shall be located on the side of the to determine the amount of lost time fi eld designated to the home team fans and the visiting team M) Spirit/Pep Line for Introductions, Warm-up Areas benches shall be located on the side of the fi eld designated for 1) Regular Season visiting team fans. a) During the regular season, A team’s spirit line is not to extend J) Band or other school Provided Music During Live Ball onto any part of the other team’s half of the playing fi eld and

CCompetition Rules 1) The band is not to play or cheers be given when the ball is alive area leading up to the playing ﬁ eld.

m by rule. b) A team’s half of the ﬁ eld will be the side on which its team p 2) Persons subject to the rules, including bands, shall not create bench is located, with the playing ﬁ eld and area leading up to

t i any noise that prohibits a team from hearing its signals. Drums, the playing ﬁ eld being dissected equally down its length. This

i o cymbals, bells and mechanical noisemakers shall not be used to includes the end zones.

R assist cheering. c) No spirit line is to extend over the forty-ﬁ ve-yard line.

u l K) Presence of a Doctor and Ambulance at Games d) No players, coaches, team attendants, or anyone associated

e s 1) It is recommended that a doctor be on site and available at all with the opposing team is to enter or interfere with the regular season games. opponent’s spirit line. 2) At all playoff games, the home school shall be responsible for 2) Postseason providing a doctor to be present. a) In games during the playoffs, played on neutral fi elds, spirit 3) At all regular season and postseason games, the designated lines will not be allowed onto the playing fi eld including the home school shall ensure that an ambulance is available (on end zones. site or properly notifi ed of game date and time to be “on-call”) b) The Association will designate warm-up areas for the to service the needs at the game and an emergency plan is championship games. distributed to all teams. N) Use of Nontraditional Film Locations 4) It is recommended that the ambulance be on site during all 1) It is an individual team decision as to whether or not fi lming is games. done from any location other than the press box and locations L) Use of Visible Play Clocks stipulated by the video standards. 1. During the regular season, if a host school has a twenty-fi ve 2) No coach utilizing a nontraditional locations may have direct second clock on both ends of the playing fi eld and both are communication with the coaching staff from the opening kickoff operable, they are to be used without mutual agreement of the until the conclusion of the game relative to the contents of what opponent. is being fi lmed or observed. 2) During the regular season, if a host school has a twenty-fi ve O) Heat Index second clock at only one end of the fi eld, the host school must All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For acquire permission from the visiting team before the clock may postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager

23 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA. P) Deadline to Start Contest No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 p.m. local time at any contest site.

CCompetition Rules

24 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according Governing Golf to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be for failure to comply with these provisions. appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the B) Pairings implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c 1) Region Pairings rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) a) The region manager shall contract with a KGA rules offi cial. I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS Instructions and contact information for securing this offi cial 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor shall be detailed in the postseason instructions. separate postseason competition for boys in golf, provided b) The regional manager shall place the competitiors into groups that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is (threesomes/foursomes) based on average scores. approved by the Board of Control. c) No two players from one school shall play in the same group. 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic 2) State Pairings sections with the approval of the Board of Control. a) The Commissioner’s offi ce shall, with assistance from the 3) The entire alignment shall be reviewed when the Board of KGA Rules offi cials, place the qualifying competitiors for Control conducts a realignment related to golf. the State Tournament into groups (threesomes) based upon 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled region tournament scores. on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. b) On both days of the State Tournament, no two players from 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA one school shall play in the same group. website and is updated as information changes as provided by c) On day one, the low scores will be entered in early groups. the membership with regard to participation. d) On day two, the high schools will be entered in the early groups. II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION e) Day two times for individual members of advancing will be A) Dates for Play based on scores. After times are set for day two, coaches 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control cannot change the order of competitors. In the event of a tie, shall determine the dates and sites of the region and state the earlier fi nished gets the later time on day two. tournaments. f) In the state tournament, there will be a cut after the fi rst day 2) All tournaments shall be held within the dates indicated on of play. the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the g) Second round pairings will be made at the close of the fi rst Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating 18 holes by the KHSAA in conjunction with the KGA Rules school representatives. Schedule confl icts with other academic offi cials. required activities will be resolved by the offi ce of the h) The second round pairings will be announced via the KHSAA Commissioner. web site. B) Sites for Play 3) State Pairing Error 1) The region courses shall properly measure within allowable a) If after the announcement, it is discovered that competitors ranges for postseason play. For the girls this will be no less than have been erroneously paired, the KHSAA staff will work with 5000 and no greater than 5700 yards. For the boys the yardage KGA offi cials to properly notify the coach of the erroneously will be no less than 6200 and no greater than 6800 yards. paired competitors. 2) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region b) If such notifi cation of an erroneous pairing is not able to tournament sites. be made to the coach prior to 9:00 p.m. on the fi rst night 3) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after of play, the tee time adjustments will be made at the State consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The Tournament site prior to the start of second round play. prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to c) No player whose coach was unable to be timely notifi ed and seating and parking facilities and such other information as may who was erroneously placed shall be compelled to play in an be requested by the Commissioner. earlier time than perviously announced. 4) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection d) No representative of the KHSAA or the KGA will attempt plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining personal contact with any competitor to correct a pairing the sites.

CCompetition Rules error.

o 5) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to m January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS p A) Roster Requirement e already having a suitable facility for hosting the tournament

t i 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on

i shall be allowed to apply. o the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its n 6) Only those competing in the current year will be allowed to

R online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. u vote for the region tournament site selection plan. If a region is

e 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and

s unable to resolve confl ict over a plan, the Commissioner shall establish a plan. shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. 7) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for community/area support. tournament play. 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS AND PAIRINGS documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. A) Selection of Tournament Manager B) Individual Entry Requirements 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the 1) To be eligible to compete in the region or state tournament, region tournaments. a contestant shall have competed in a minimum of four (4) 2) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state matches on a team or as an individual representing a member tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant school during the regular season. managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. 2) At least one of the four matches shall be an 18-hole match. 3) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools Coaches should maintain and have available copies of all results participating in the tournament as to the time and place of for the region manager to verify in case of a challenge to the the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material required participation minimums by any athlete. and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all C) Team Entry and Advancement arrangements to conduct the tournament. 1) The initial entry report for contestants in the region meet shall 4) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform be submitted not later than 5:00 p.m. four (4) days prior to the the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 25 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK region meet. VIII) SPECIAL TOURNAMENT AND REGULAR SEASON RULES 2) A school may enter a maximum of fi ve (5) players in the region A) Playing Rules tournament from the electronic roster. 1) All Tournaments shall be played using the Rules of Golf as D) Advancement to State Meet established by the United State Golf Association unless modifi ed 1) The winning team (4 or 5 players) from the region tournament by the KHSAA. will advance to the state tournament. 2) Additional rules otherwise developed by the KHSAA may 2) In addition, the seven lowest scorer not on the region winning be implemented in contests played in Kentucky and will be team, will advance to the state tournament. distributed to the membership when relevant. E) Substitutions 3) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and 1) Any player whose name appears on that electronic roster may participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. be substituted on a team prior to the fi rst time of play for the 4) The KHSAA and its managers will contract with KGA/PGA region tournament. personnel to assist with the Region and State Tournaments. 2) Any player whose name appears on that electronic roster may 5) The KHSAA Board of Control constitute the KHSAA Rules be substituted on a team prior to the fi rst time of play in the fi rst Committee for all postseason play as it relates to USGA Rules. round for the state tournament. B) Specifi cations for Golf Courses and Tournaments 3) There will be no substitutes for individual qualifi ers. In the 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards for case that an individual qualifi er is unable to play at the state golf courses to be used in tournament play may be developed tounament, the individual player with the next lowest region by Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by score may be substituted prior to the groups being set. the Board of Control. V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 2) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. (region and state) shall be selected by the Association staff in 3) For the region tournaments stroke play for 18 holes shall be consultation with the Kentucky Golf Association representatives. used. B) The KGA rules offi cial shall establish the conditions of play at the 4) For the State Tournament, stroke play for 36 holes shall be used. region and state tournaments. 5) The regional and state course must be set up for girls with no VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS less than 5000 yards and no greater than 5700 yards. A) Champion 6) The regional and state course must be set up for boys with no 1) The team champion of each region tournament is the four less than 6200 yards and no greater than 6800 yards. or fi ve-person team with the lowest aggregate score for four C) Tie-Breaker golfers playing 18 holes. 1) Regular Season 2) The individual champion at the region tournament is the golfer The local committee shall agree upon a formula for breaking with the lowest score. necessary ties PRIOR TO the beginning of all regular season 3) The team champion of the state tournament shall be the four tournaments (if ties are to be broken) and share the procedure or fi ve-person team with the lowest aggregate score for four with all coaches. golfers playing 36 holes. 2) Region and State Tournament 4) The individual champion of the state tournament is the a) A tie for fi rst place by a team or individual will be broken individual with the lowest score for 36 holes. by a hole-by-hole sudden-death playoff immediately upon 5) The tournament committee may cancel the State tournament, completion of play. or shorten the tournament to one round (18 holes) if it is b) The best 4 of 5 scores with respect to par will determine the deemed advisable because of conditions beyond the control of team playoff score. all involved including providence. c) The individual playoff will precede the team playoff if both 6) At the State Tournament, the champion (team and individual) are required. will be determined after 18 holes if the second round is canceled d) The holes to be used will be designated by the Tournament or not entirely completed. Manager prior to the start of the fi rst day of play 7) At the State Tournament, a tie for fi rst place by a team or e) For a two-team tie, pairings will be as follows, with player individual will be broken by a hole-by-hole sudden-death playoff numbered order determined by tournament scores: immediately following the conclusion of the round. 1. Group I: Team A (Players 3-4-5) Team B (Players 4-5) B) Trophies and Awards 2, Group II: Team A (Players 1-2) Team B (Players 1-2-3)

CCompetition Rules 1) Region. f) For a tie with three or more teams, the tie-breaker will proceed

o m a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up. as follows: p 1. Hole #1: Player #1 from each team e b) Awards will be given to the individual winners through eighth

t i 2. Hole #2: Player #2 from each team t place.

i o 2) State. 3. Hole #3: Player #3 from each team

R a) Trophies will be awarded to the teams ﬁ nishing ﬁ rst, second, 4. Hole #4: Player #4 from each team

u l 5. Hole #5: Player #5 from each team e third and fourth at the state tournament. s b) The fi ve individuals on the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, third D) Carry/Cart Rule and fourth will receive awards at the state tournament, Each player shall carry his/her own clubs or pull a cart (motorized c) Awards will be given to the individuals fi nishing fi rst through carts are not permitted for coaches or participants). eighth place. E) KHSAA Local Rules and Conditions of Competition for KHSAA d) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals Events (regular and postseason) (HARD CARD) at the state tournament. 1) Play is governed by the current Rules of Golf and the Decision VII) FINANCES based on them published by the United States Golf Association A) Region and, where applicable, by the following Local Rules and 1) The fi nances of the region meet will be managed at the region Defi nitions, subject to changes for particular tournaments by the level. KHSAA Rules Committee. Appendix I refers to Appendix of Local 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of Rules in the USGA Rules of Golf booklet. net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to 2) Unless otherwise noted, the penalty for breach of a Local Rule any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment or condition is: made by teams to help offset event costs. a) Stroke Play – Two Strokes B) State b) Match Play – Loss of Hole 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. 3) Coaching Advice Rule 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors a) The Committee may, in the conditions of a team competition participating in the state meet. (Rule 33-1), permit each team to appoint a coach, who has met all KHSAA coaching requirements and who is appointed

26 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK by the school and is listed within the school information on Rule 23 - shall include wood chips and mulch. fi le with the KHSAA, who may give advice (including pointing 16) Ground Under Repair out a line for putting) to members of that team. Defi ned by white lines. French drains and fi re ant mounds are b) The Committee may establish conditions relating to the ground under repair areas. appointment and permitted conduct of that person, who must 17) Sodded Areas be identifi ed to the Committee before giving advice. a) Relief may be taken from sodded areas if the ball lies in or c) There are no conditions on conduct of a coach in this regard, touches a sod seam. other than requiring advice to be given in a private manner b) A player may also take relief if the intended area of their and requiring that the advice does not unduly delay play. swing may be interfered by a sod seam. They player shall drop d) Coaches are prohibited from being on the putting greens and the ball as near to where it originally lay, which is not nearer prohibits coaches from entering all hazards (other than to the hole, avoids interference by the condition and is not in a search for golf balls). hazard or on a putting green. e) A breach of this advice rule by any coach will result in a 18) Roads and Paths – White Lines 2-stroke penalty for the player. For each additional breach by White-lined areas tying into roads or paths have the same status a coach, a 2-stroke penalty will be assessed to the player. as the roads or paths, that of obstructions. f) Coaches may use electronic measuring devices during 19) Automotive Transportation competition of the KHSAA Region, State or Invitational a) Unless otherwise permitted by the Committee, players shall tournaments. not use automotive transportation during a stipulated round. g) A player may have the line indicated to him by a coach, but b) Optional condition as prescribed in Appendix I shall be in he/she may not be positioned by the player on or close to effect. the line or an extension of the line beyond the hole while 20) Discontinuance of Play the stroke is being made. Coaches (including their cart) are When play is suspended for a dangerous situation, if the players considered an outside agency and would not be penalized if in the group are between the play of two holes, they shall not their ball struck them or their cart. resume play until the Committee has ordered a resumption h) Further rules regarding the Advice Rule may be developed for of play. If they are in the process of playing a hole, they shall KHSAA Region and State Tournaments and shall be distributed discontinue play immediately and shall not thereafter resume to the competiting teams. play until the Committee has ordered a resumption of play. 4) List of Conforming Golf Balls 21) KGA Rules Help Line (800-254-2742) Option Condition prescribed in Appendix I shall be in effect. F) Advice Rule for Postseason Competition 5) Conformity of Golf Clubs 1) The Committee may, in the conditions of a team competition The player’s clubs shall conform to Rule 4, provisions, (Rule 33-1), permit each team to appoint a coach, who has met specifi cations and interpretations set forth in Appendix II. all KHSAA coaching requirements and who is appointed by the 6) Pace of Play school and is listed within the school information on fi le with See separate memorandum to players for the pace of play the KHSAA, who may give advice (including pointing out a line guidelines. for putting) to members of that team. 7) Practice Between Holes 2) During play, the contestants may receive advice from the Between the play of two holes, a player shall not play any designated high school coach in accordance with this KHSAA practice stroke on or near the putting green of the hole last Golf Coaching Advice Rule: played. a) The Committee may establish conditions relating to the 8) Lifting an Embedded Ball Through the Green appointment and permitted conduct of that person, who must Local Rule, as prescribed in Appendix I, shall be in effect. be identifi ed to the Committee before giving advice. 9) Tree Wrappings, Electrical Wires and Cables, Closely Attached b) There are no conditions on conduct of a coach in this regard, to Trees other than requiring advice to be given in a private manner Such wires and cable are not obstructions. No relief without and requiring that the advice does not unduly delay play. penalty. c) Coaches are prohibited from being on the putting greens and 10) Staked Trees from entering all hazards (other than to search for golf balls). Local Rule, as prescribed in Appendix I, shall be in effect. Relief d) If a coach is found to be in violation of the advice rule (e.g., may be taken without penalty. disruption of play or use of more than one designated coach),

CCompetition Rules 11) Permanent Elevated Power Lines and Cables a two-stroke penalty against the team score will be assessed

m Local Rule, as prescribed in Appendix I, shall be in effect. for each violation. p 12) Out of Bounds e) If a player(s) is found in violation of the advice rule, the

t i a) Deﬁ ned by the inside edge, at ground level, of white stakes player(s) and/or team will be assessed a two-stroke penalty.

i o and/or white lines and/or fence post. f) Players may not give to or receive advice from another team’s

R b) When a white line on the ground deﬁ nes Out of Bound the players or coaches.

u l line itself is Out of Bounds. Please Note: “A ball which crosses g) If a coach is found to be in violation of the advice rule (e.g.

e s a public road deined as out of bounds and comes to rest disruption of play or use of more than one designated coach) beyond that road is out of bounds, even though it may lie on a two stroke penalty will be assessed against each individual another part of the course.” player receiving the illegal advice. 13) Water Hazards h) Each additional violation against a coach will also result in an a) Defi ned by yellow lines and/or identifi ed by yellow stakes. additional two stroke penalty against the overall team score. b) When both stakes and lines are present the stakes will identify i) A player may have the line of play indicated to him/her by a the hazard and the lines will defi ne the margin. coach, but he/she may not be positioned by the player on or c) When water hazards are bounded by out bounds, the hazard close to the line or an extension of the line beyond the hold margin extends to and coincides with the out of bounds line. while the stroke is being made. 14) Lateral Water Hazards j) Coaches (including their cart) are considered an outside a) Defi ned by red lines and/or identifi ed by red stakes. When agency and would not be penalized if one of their player’s ball both stakes and lines are present the stakes will identify the strikes the coach or the cart. hazard and the lines will defi ne the margin. k) A coach, player or team disqualifi cation can result from b) When a lateral water hazard is defi ned only one side, its coaching advice rule violations. margin is deemed to extend infi nitely. l) Spectators should be no closer than 30 yards from a player c) When lateral water hazards are bounded by out of bounds, at any time and at no time be on the green, tee, in a fairway, the hazard margin extends to and coincides with the out of bunker, or hazard, nor should they ever stand behind a player bounds line. during his/her swing. 15) Loose Impediment m) The high school head coach attending the annually required

27 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA Golf Rules Clinics will be the individual identifi ed for NOTE: Tournament directors are encouraged to take all all levels of postseason play as the only coach allowable, preventive steps possible including notifi cation to coaches and under the “Advice Rule”, to converse with players from that players to prevent violation, but failure to issue such notice shall high school team. Any change in the identity of that individual not constitute a waiver of the restriction. MUST come through offi cial notifi cation from the high school J) Heat Index Principal or Athletic Director. Any designated head coach must All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For meet the KHSAA coaching qualifi cation requirements (KHSAA postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager Bylaw 25). to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to G) Dress the KHSAA. 1) Appropriate dress is required. Both boys and girls must wear shirts with collars or course permissible turtle (or mock) neck shirts. Girls, but not boys, may wear sleeveless shirts. Plain Bermuda shorts are permissible. Jams and cut-offs are not permissible. Short shorts are not acceptable. Girl’s short’s inseam must be at least fi ve (5) inches. Hemmed cargo shorts are permissible. No blue jeans or shorts made of denim material are allowed. 2) Appropriate golf or tennis shoes are required. 3) Spikes, if worn, must be Soft Spikes. 4) Coaches and players are expected to observe the dress code during practice and competitive play rounds at the State Tournament. H. Distance-Measuring Devices: 1) For all KHSAA postseason competition, a player may obtain distance information by using a distance-measuring device that shall be capable of measuring distance only. Such information may also be obtained from a coach as designated in Bylaw 25. 2) If, during a stipulated round, a player or coach uses a distance- measuring device that is designed to gauge or measure other conditions that might affect play (e.g., gradient/slope, wind- speed, temperature, etc.), the player is in breach of Rule 14-3, for which the penalty is disqualifi cation. This penalty is to be imposed whether or not any such additional function is actually used. NOTE: The restriction on the use of distance-measuring devices that are capable of measuring anything but distance will be reiterated in the published instructions and KHSAA hard card, and golfers directed to not use any of the restricted devices while they are on the course. 3) Helpful information concerning the use of these devices can be found on the KHSAA web site at http://khsaa.org/sports/fall/ golf/, and then click General Information. 4) For all regular season competition involving KHSAA member schools, host facilities are permitted to address the permissive or restrictive use of distance measuring devices, but are not permitted to allow any distance-measuring device that is designed to gauge or measure other conditions that might affect play (e.g., gradient/slope, wind-speed, temperature, etc.)

CCompetition Rules NOTE: Tournament directors are encouraged to take all

m preventive steps possible including notiﬁ cation to coaches and p players to prevent violation, but failure to issue such notice shall

t i not constitute a waiver of the restriction.

i o I) Communication Devices:

R 1) For all KHSAA postseason competition, voice communication

u l devices (including all types of cell phones, two-way radios, and

e s other devices) may not be turned on or used by a player, his side or caddie during any stipulated round or match. 2) If used during a round or match, for anything other than at the direction of tournament management or a life or health and safety threatening emergency, the player is in breach of Rule 33- 7, for which the penalty is: 1st Offense, Warning, 2nd Offense, Disqualiﬁ cation for serious breach of etiquette. NOTE: The restriction on the use of voice communication devices will be reiterated in the published instructions and KHSAA hard card, and golfers directed to ensure that if the device is in the bag of the golfer for use at the direction of tournament management or in an emergency, it remain in an off position and available solely for use in the case of an actual emergency. 3) For all regular season competition involving KHSAA member schools, host facilities are encouraged to address the permissive or restrictive use of communication devices, but are not permitted to allow any communication device during play unless it is at the direction of tournament management or a life or health and safety threatening emergency.

28 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record Governing Soccer in the fi rst game played against all district opponents (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) involved in the tie. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the breaker. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING shall be the next tie-breaker. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team separate postseason competition in soccer for boys and girls, drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and seed (one seed) such is approved by the Board of Control. f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic would be uniform for all three-team districts. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. tie-breaking purposes. 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For district tournaments with four or more teams, the district on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the district is required in order B) District Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For district tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the districts shall only two teams the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a district a) The head to head results from the regular season shall with four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number 1 seed for postseason a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including play. all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the b) The number 1 seed shall host the district tournament (region if participating teams in the district and the manager shall the sport does not have districts) and shall be the designated record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. home team, even if unable to host the game at their home site The representatives making the written declaration shall due to facility requirements in the sport. decide all issues related to seeding, 2) For district tournaments with three teams, the district b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of tournament shall be seeded in accordance with the following the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided three-team seeding rules: to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote a) The competing teams within a district shall, by majority vote, of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding determine if the schools are required to play each other once decisions. Such changes to the district seeding plan may not or twice during the regular season. These games will produce be made for the current year once play has begun in the a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these regular season. districts. c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. the district tournament, and advances to the championship d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of game. the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of position. the district tournament with the loser of that game being e) It shall be the district tournament manager’s responsibility eliminated. to update the Association with respect to any changes to d) In the case of a two-way tie for the district winning position, the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant

CCompetition Rules tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation

t i with interpretation and clariﬁ cation.

i the tied district opponents would have the higher o f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once n ﬁ nishing position.

R the determination has been made to seed. A recommended u b. In districts that have decided to play each other twice l point system for seeded district play has been adopted by e in district play, the winner in the second game played

s between the tied district opponents would have the the Board of Control following a recommendation from the higher fi nishing position. Commissioner’s Advisory Committee on Soccer. e) In the case of a three-way tie for the district winning position, (1) Each team shall play each district opponent at least once the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of during the regular season. the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the (2) Each team is awarded three (3) points for a win other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result (3) Each team is awarded one (1) point for a tie in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (4) Each team is awarded zero (0) points for loss tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between (5) The team that has the highest point total will be awarded those two. the number one (1) seed. The team with the second highest (1) In districts that have decided to play each other only once point total will be the number two seed. The team with the in district play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The third highest point total will be the number three seed. The team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest team with the fourth highest point total will be the fourth seed (one seed). seed. The team with the fi fth highest point total will be the (2) In districts that have decided to play each other twice in fi fth seed. Etc. district play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall (6) Tie breaker Procedures be: a. In the event of a two way tie after point calculations a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record and each team plays each other once, the winner of the in the second game played against all district opponents regular season contest will be the higher seed in the involved in the tie. tournament bracket. 29 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK b. In the event of a two way tie after point calculations and tournament include but are not limited to: district teams choose to play each other more than once, a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate the winner of the last game will be awarded the higher past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; seed. b) an offi cials dressing room; c. In the event there are multiple ties, a district could choose c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and an alternative method for determining the highest seed. d) meet the published site selection criteria for soccer as posted d. a blind draw would determine the higher seed winner on the KHSAA website. e. the team that allowed the fewest goals in district play 5) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. would be awarded the higher seed. Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used shall their request through a meeting of the Principals or Designated be the records as of midnight Wednesday prior to the Monday Representatives of all schools in the region and shall supply of the week of the district tournament. Teams and school information relating to the listed criteria for hosting. The representatives may meet during the regular season to discuss Commissioner’s offi ce may use this site selection plan as a tournament operations (i.e. dates, times, sites, tournament guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining the sites. personnel needs, etc.). However if an organizational meeting 6) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for is held prior to the published date on the calendar, no recommending the region tournament sites and voting shall discussions may be held regarding the bracketing or pairings include all schools within a region, not simply the schools of specifi c teams unless all mandated seeded games have playing in a particular year’s event. been played prior to the meeting. 7) Criteria to be considered by the schools for recommending h) Seeded games unable to be played for any reason (with the regional tournament sites include but are not limited to: exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate deadline for seeded games shall be recorded as a win and a past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; loss for both teams in computing seeded position. b) an offi cials dressing room; i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and team into a previously seeded district during the current d) meet the published site selection criteria for soccer as posted school year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If on the KHSAA website. the new team enters the alignment following the completion 8) The schools in the district and region shall agree on the amount of all game contracts and the new team is unable to schedule of proceeds (if any) that is to be kept by the host school as well all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the as limitations on expenses by the host school; determining the last position for the current season, and shall be included fi xed amount or percentages to be given to each school that in seeded game scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a participates; the fi xed amount or percentages to be given to single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the each team in the region not competing in the tournament; and previous school year, the district teams will conduct a new the disbursement of any proceeds from commissions, parking, vote as to seeding. advertising and any other revenue related to the tournament but j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one not directly related to ticket, program or novelty sales. Resolution team into a seeded district, the district teams shall conduct a as to disputes on any of these issues may be facilitated by the new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding Commissioner’s offi ce and if agreement cannot be reached, may decision being not seeded. be considered by the Board of Control. k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams 8) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state within a district, the teams in the district shall conduct a new tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing the district being not seeded. facilities, and community/area support. l) Once a vote has been conducted for the district to be seeded, III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS all required contests shall be considered to be contracted A) Selection of Tournament Manager for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of representatives do not notify all schools in the district of the school to serve as the manager for each district tournament. their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the 2) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is not region tournaments.

CCompetition Rules speciﬁ ed, a $1000 default forfeiture fee will be assessed for 3) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the semi-

o m non-played contests. state games. p II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION 4) It is the duty of each district and region tournament manager

t i A) Dates for Play to invite representatives of the participating teams in the

i o 1) District tournament play shall begin not later than Monday tournament to a meeting held for the purpose of making

R of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for district tournaments. tournament plans.

e Tournaments may begin prior to that Monday if all schools 5) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform s concur and all regular season play is ended. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 2) Region tournament play shall begin not later than Tuesday entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for region tournaments. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball, 3) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated fi eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact on the Memorandum Calendar as local conditions permit. Any the KHSAA Scoreboard with the fi nal results following each exceptions shall be approved by the Commissioner. contest. This is in addition to fulfi lling local media requests. The B) Sites for Play receipts of a tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against 1) District tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. plan approved by a 2/3 majority vote of the schools eligible to 6) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state compete in each district tournament. tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant 2) If a district is unable to resolve confl ict over the plan, the managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. Commissioner shall establish a plan. B) Tournament Meeting 3) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, shall tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times be allowed to vote for the district tournament location or of the games, and make all other arrangements necessary to participate in the tournament. conduct the tournament. 4) Criteria to be considered by the schools for the district 2) The district meetings shall be held in the school designated as

30 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the accordance to the following procedure. week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar. a) The participants may determine the order in which the These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to teams. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, 3) The Region meeting shall be held on Sunday afternoon alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw immediately following the district tournaments not prior to 2:00 to determine the order of draw) or any other method for local time in the school designated as the host. These meetings which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all teams, but not NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. prior to the completion of all district tournament games. The site b) In a region tournament with participants from four districts, for future regional tournaments is not an issue for this meeting the district winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a unless the Principal or the Designated Representative as listed standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up on the KHSAA website is present for all teams in the region (not team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. limited to the competing teams). c) In a region tournament with participants from three districts, C) Tournament Pairings the draw shall be conducted as follows. The format will 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing follow a standard eight-team bracket with two byes, those for each school. falling into positions 2 and 7. The district winners shall draw 2) District (non-seeded): The pairings for the district tournament for positions 1 and 8 in the bracket. The district winner not shall be made in accordance with the following procedure, with drawing a bye shall draw for a position in slots 3 through all byes being arranged to be in the fi rst round: 6. The district runner-up to the district champion drawing for a) The appropriate bracket shall be used for team placement position in slots 3 through 6 will draw into one of the two according to the number of teams entering the tournament: remaining slots in the bracket opposite the district winner, and (1) For three (3) teams, the bracket is seeded by rule and form the remaining two runner-up teams will be placed opposite BR103 shall be used; their corresponding district winners in the remaining two slots (2) For four (4) teams, the unseeded BR104 shall be used; in the bracket. (3) For fi ve (5) teams, the unseeded BR105 shall be used; d) In a region tournament with participants from two districts, (4) For six (6) teams, the unseeded BR106 shall be used; the draw shall be conducted as follows. The district winners (5) For seven (7) teams, the unseeded BR107 shall be used; will draw for positions 1 and 3 in a standard four-team (6) For eight (8) teams, the unseeded BR108 shall be used; bracket. Each corresponding runner-up team will be placed in (7) If more than eight (8) teams are in the district bracket, the position in the opposite bracket from the district winner. contact the KHSAA offi ces for assistance in utilizing the e) In regions where the drawing of district boundaries result in unseeded BR116 bracket. two or three districts, the Board of Control may approve an b) The participants may determine the order in which the alternate format in order to allow for a full eight-team bracket bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to in the region tournament. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, f) The winner of each region tournament shall advance to the alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw semi-state tournament. to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 5) Semi-State. which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may a) The state shall be divided into eight semi-state areas for both NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. boys and girls play for the fi rst round of the state tournament. c) The participants shall then draw for the non-BYE positions b) Each semi-state game shall be held at a fi eld that meets the in the bracket. For example, in a fi ve team bracket, the draw site specifi cations for holding a semi-state game whether or shall be for positions 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. not the host is playing in the contest. d) The home team shall be determined by the bracket form. c) The winner of each semi-state game advances to the State e) The games of the tournament shall be played in the order Tourament. listed on the bracket unless unanimous agreement is reached d) The semi-state pairings for six-year period are: among the competing teams due to facility logistics concerns. SS 2019- 2020- 2021- 2022- 2023- 2024- f) The district champion and the runner-up of each single 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 1 1@4 3@1 1@2 4@1 1@3 2@1 elimination tournament shall advance to the region tournament. 2 3@2 2@4 3@4 2@3 4@2 4@3 3 5@8 7@5 5@6 8@5 5@7 6@5

CCompetition Rules 3) District (seeded). After seeding positions have been determined, o 4 7@6 6@8 7@8 6@7 8@6 8@7 m the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall p be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single 5 9@12 11@9 9@10 12@9 9@11 10@9

t i elimination bracket. The brackets (from top down) are as follows: t 6 11@10 10@12 11@12 10@11 12@10 12@11

i o a) 2 Team - The district tournament shall then be a single game, n 7 13@16 15@13 13@14 16@13 13@15 14@13

R with the winner being advanced to the region tournament as

u 8 15@14 14@16 15@16 14@15 16@14 16@15 l the district winner (regardless of the regular season results).

e s b) 3 Teams (seeded by rule) – Seed 2 plays 3, Seed 1 plays 6) State. The Commissioner shall direct a blind draw for pairings in winner of Seed 2 vs. Seed 3 for championship. the boys’ and girls’ state soccer tourments. c) 4 Teams - Seed 1 plays 4, 2 plays 3, winners meet for 7) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing teams, championship. any bracket not drawn in accordance with the above procedures d) 5 Teams - Seed 5 plays 4, 1 plays winner of 5 vs. 4, 2 plays 3, may be directed to be corrected, including the replay of contests, remaining winners meet for championship. by the Commissioner’s offi ce. e) 6 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of 4 vs. IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS 5, 2 plays winner of 3 vs. 6, remaining winners meet for A) Roster Requirement championship. 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on f) 7 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its 4 vs. 5, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, remaining winners online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. meet for championship. 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and g) 8 Teams - Seed 1 plays 8, 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 vs. 8 shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. winner plays 4 vs. 5 winner, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked remaining winners meet for championship. so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised h) The district champion and the runner-up of each single following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for elimination tournament shall advance to the region tournament play. tournament. 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a 4) Region. The pairings for the region tournament shall be made in documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner.

31 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK B) Withdrawal after draw public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT 1) No school which enters a district, region, semi-state or public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; state tournament (draws for place) shall withdraw from the 6) A crew of three (3) offi cials shall be assigned to regular season tournament or forfeit any of its games, but shall play its entire and postseason play; tournament schedule. 7) Offi cials desiring to be assigned to the Region and State 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region, semi-state or Tournaments shall have within the preceding four years, state tournament at any time following the draw for district attended the Soccer Offi cials Camp; tournament positions or after the pairings have been determined 8) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play; in a seeded district, that school shall be penalized in accordance 9) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at with Bylaw 27. the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved C) Photo Requirement by the Commissioner. Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS compliance with published deadlines and directives. A) Champion D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions 1) The champion of each district and region tournament will be the 1) A school may enter a team composed of twenty-four (24) team undefeated in a single elimination tournament. players in each postseason tournament game from the roster 2) The champion of the state tournament will be the winning team submitted online. in a single elimination tournament. 2) The twenty four (24) players shall be designated each game, B) Trophies and Awards and no other players may be in uniform and tournament 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament management may limit the total number of individuals in the winner and runner-up. bench area. 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS gate receipts of that tournament. A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal shall receive a trophy and twenty-seven (27) individual medals. Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published including a Most Valuable Player. guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason tournament. contests shall be: VII) FINANCES, PASSES 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, A) District and Region meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once 1) The proceeds of each of the district and region tournaments every four years to be eligible for the four years following the shall be used to defray the expenses of the participating training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the teams, offi cials, trophies and other necessary expenses. Net KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison profi t or loss shall be shared based on the revenue distribution in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be plan approved by a vote of the schools in the classifi cation in for state and regional play in the sports in which such training accordance with the KHSAA Constitution. All gross receipts is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; payment made by teams to help offset event costs. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during 2) If no agreement can be reached on payment of expenses for current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the district or region tournaments, a mileage fee of $1.00 per team Commission; per mile for each necessary trip should be allowed for travel 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved expense and an allowance for one meal at $5.00 per team makeup clinic; member per trip to the tournament should be allowed. 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a B) Semi-State sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and 1) The Association will fi nance the semi-state games. Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these 2) Following the receipt of the fi nancial report from the semi-state four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing games, the Association shall pay all bills from the games, excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences 3) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School

CCompetition Rules as properly attending; Athletic Association shall retain equal shares to the host and

o m 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates participating teams in the semi-state games and shall retain an p to ﬁ nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive e equal share.

t i this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of t C) State

i o ofﬁ cials within a particular sport; and 1) The Association will ﬁ nance the state tournament.

R 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 2) Each participating team will receive an expense allowance for

l e offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than twenty-four (24) players and one coach. s the published late deadline for licensing year. 3) If the Association makes motel/hotel assignments, teams failing D) Postseason soccer offi cials shall meet the following additional to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the Association shall criteria: forfeit their lodging allowance. 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored state championship 4) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per competition shall be assigned by the Commission and shall be mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of licensed by the Kentucky High School Athletic Association; $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the VIII) SPECIAL TOURNAMENT AND REGULAR SEASON RULES regional, semi-state or State Tournaments. Exceptions may be A) Playing Rules approved by the Commission; 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Soccer Rules as 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, assignments to district, region, and state tournament contests governed by State Association adoption provisions in the through the Assigning Secretary. The fi nal selection shall be National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the made by the Commission; Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season B) Specifi cations of Fields and Game Balls evaluations; 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards 5) The resultant rankings of offi cials (fi nal ranked list of scores) is for fi elds to be used in tournament play may be developed by

32 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the f) Following fi ve kicks for each team, the team scoring on the Board of Control. greatest number of these kicks shall be declared the winner. 2) To be eligible to host a region, and all subsequent rounds, the g) Add one goal to the winning team score and credit the team facility must be equipped with lights that adhere to the KHSAA with a victory. An asterisk (*) may be placed by the team lighting standards. advancing to indicate the advancement was the result of a 3) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a tiebreaker system. ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. 3) If the score remains tied after each team has had fi ve kicks: C) Tied games (Regular Season) a) Each coach will select fi ve different players than the fi rst When a game is tied at the end of a regular season contest that fi ve who already have kicked to take the kicks in a “sudden is not part of an event where a progression to the next round is victory” situation, wherein if one team scores and the other dependent upon that game’s winner, and the contest is not a part team does not score, the game is ended without more kicks of a seeded district, the game shall end tied. being taken. If a team has fewer than ten available players D) Tied games in Regular Season Progression Events (i.e. Invitational at the end of the fi rst set of kicks from the penalty mark due Tournaments) to either injuries or disqualifi cation, the coach shall use all 1) When the score is tied at the end of regulation time, the referee players who have not participated in the fi rst fi ve kicks. The will instruct both teams to return to their respective team areas. coach may choose additional players from the fi rst fi ve kickers There will be fi ve minutes during which both teams may confer to ensure that fi ve different players participate in the second with their coaches and the head referee will instruct both teams set of kicks. as to proper procedure. b) If the score remains tied, continue the “sudden victory” kicks 2) The head referee shall choose the goal at which all of the kicks with the coach selecting any fi ve players to take the next set from the penalty mark shall be taken. of alternating kicks. If a tie still remains, repeat 3-a. a) Each coach will select any fi ve players, including the 4) During all tiebreaker penalty kicks, the ball remains alive until goalkeeper, on or off the fi eld (except those who may have its momentum is spent, it goes out of bounds or it is retouched been disqualifi ed) to take the kicks. by the kicker. b) A coin toss shall be held as in Rule 5-2-2d. The team winning F) Mercy Rule Provisions the toss shall have the choice of kicking fi rst or second. 1) If one team has a 10 goal lead at the end of the fi rst half or at c) Teams will alternate kickers. There is no follow-up on the kick. any point in the second half, the match will be terminated. d) The defending team may change the goalkeeper prior to each 2) This rule is to be observed in regular and postseason play penalty kick. G) Heat Index e) Following fi ve kicks for each team, the team scoring on the 1) All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For greatest number of these kicks shall be declared the winner. postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager f) Add one goal to the winning team score and credit the team to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to with a victory. The KHSAA strongly recommends that an the KHSAA. asterisk (*) be placed by the team advancing to indicate the 2) In games where the heat index has been determined to be 95 advancement was the result of a tiebreaker system. or higher: 3) If the score remains tied after each team has had fi ve kicks: a) play will be stopped at the next natural stoppage after the a) Each coach will select fi ve different players than the fi rst 20-minute mark of each half of play to allow the student- fi ve who already have kicked to take the kicks in a “sudden athletes and offi cials to take a mandatory 10-minute heat victory” situation, wherein if one team scores and the other timeout and water break; team does not score, the game is ended without more kicks b) Contest offi cials will get heat index information from game being taken. If a team has fewer than ten available players management before the start of the contest and they will at the end of the fi rst set of kicks from the penalty mark due implement the timeout procedures by notifying the coaches to either injuries or disqualifi cation, the coach shall use all at the required pre-game meetingl and players who have not participated in the fi rst fi ve kicks. The c) Under no circumstances shall play continue past the coach may choose additional players from the fi rst fi ve kickers 30-minute mark without the stoppage. to ensure that fi ve different players participate in the second H) Deadline to Start Contest set of kicks. No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 b) If the score remains tied, continue the “sudden victory” kicks p.m. local time at any contest site.

CCompetition Rules with the coach selecting any ﬁ ve players to take the next set

m of alternating kicks. If a tie still remains, repeat 3-A. p 4) During all tiebreaker penalty kicks, the ball remains alive until

t i its momentum is spent, it goes out of bounds or it is retouched

i o by the kicker.

R E) Tied games (Regular Season Seeded District and all Post-Season

u l Rounds)

e s 1) There shall be two fi ve-minute sudden-victory overtime periods. If a team scores in those periods, the match shall end. a) A coin toss shall be held-as in Rule 5-2-2d. b) At the end of the fi rst sudden-victory period, if no team has scored teams shall change ends. c) There shall be a two-minute interval between periods. 2) If the score remains tied, all coaches, offi cials and team captains shall assemble at the halfway line to review the procedure as outlined below: a) The head referee shall choose the goal at which all of the kicks from the penalty mark shall be taken. b) Each coach will select any fi ve players, including the goalkeeper, on or off the fi eld (except those who may have been disqualifi ed) to take the kicks. c) A coin toss shall be held as in Rule 5-2-2d. The team winning the toss shall have the choice of kicking fi rst or second. d) Teams will alternate kickers. There is no follow-up on the kick. e) The defending team may change the goalkeeper prior to each penalty kick.

33 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record Governing Softball (Fastpitch) in the fi rst game played against all district opponents (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) involved in the tie. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the breaker. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING shall be the next tie-breaker. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team postseason competition in fastpitch softball for girls, provided drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is seed (one seed) approved by the Board of Control. f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic would be uniform for all three-team districts. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. tie-breaking purposes. 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For district tournaments with four or more teams, the district on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the district is required in order B) District Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For district tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the districts shall only two teams the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a district a) The head to head results from the regular season shall with four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number 1 seed for postseason a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including play. all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the b) The number 1 seed shall host the district tournament (region if participating teams in the district and the manager shall the sport does not have districts) and shall be the designated record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. home team, even if unable to host the game at their home site The representatives making the written declaration shall due to facility requirements in the sport. decide all issues related to seeding, 2) For district tournaments with three teams, the district b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of tournament shall be seeded in accordance with the following the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided three-team seeding rules: to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote a) The competing teams within a district shall, by majority vote, of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding determine if the schools are required to play each other once decisions. Such changes to the district seeding plan may not or twice during the regular season. These games will produce be made for the current year once play has begun in the a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these regular season. districts. c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. the district tournament, and advances to the championship d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of game. the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of position. the district tournament with the loser of that game being e) It shall be the district tournament manager’s responsibility eliminated. to update the Association with respect to any changes to d) In the case of a two-way tie for the district winning position, the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant

CCompetition Rules tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation

t i with interpretation and clariﬁ cation.

i the tied district opponents would have the higher o f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once the n ﬁ nishing position.

s between the tied district opponents would have the of games played within a district provided all teams have higher fi nishing position. played all other teams. In that case, each district shall adopt e) In the case of a three-way tie for the district winning position, tie-breaking procedures in the event that the primary method the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of of seeding results in a tie or other situations arise which cause the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the an alteration in the scheduled seeding method. Among the other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result more common tie-breaking methods are: in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (1) seeding by overall win-loss record; tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between (2) seeding by win-loss record in specifi c contests, those two. (3) seeding by a rating/ranking from a statewide poll, (1) In districts that have decided to play each other only once (4) seeding by a majority vote, in district play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The (5) seeding by a committee, team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest (6) seeding a specifi c team (s) into a position to avoid seed (one seed). scheduling complications and issues, and (2) In districts that have decided to play each other twice in (7) seeding by a rating turned in by each school. district play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used shall be: be the records as of midnight Wednesday prior to the Monday a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record of the week of the district tournament. Teams and school in the second game played against all district opponents representatives may meet during the regular season to discuss involved in the tie. tournament operations (i.e. dates, times, sites, tournament 34 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK personnel needs, etc.). However if an organizational meeting information relating to the listed criteria for hosting. The is held prior to the published date on the calendar, no Commissioner’s offi ce may use this site selection plan as a discussions may be held regarding the bracketing or pairings guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining the sites. of specifi c teams unless all mandated seeded games have 5) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for been played prior to the meeting. recommending the region tournament sites and voting shall h) Seeded games unable to be played for any reason (with the include all schools within a region, not simply the schools exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published playing in a particular year’s event. deadline for seeded games shall be recorded as a win and a 6) Criteria to be considered by the schools for recommending loss for both teams in computing seeded position. regional tournament sites include but are not limited to: i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate team into a previously seeded district during the current past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; school year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If b) an offi cials dressing room; the new team enters the alignment following the completion c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and of all game contracts and the new team is unable to schedule d) meet the published site selection criteria for softball as posted all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the on the KHSAA website. last position for the current season, and shall be included 7) The schools in the district and the region shall agree on the in seeded game scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a amount of proceeds (if any) that is to be kept by the host single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the school as well as limitations on expenses by the host school; previous school year, the district teams will conduct a new determining the fi xed amount or percentages to be given to vote as to seeding. each school that participates; the fi xed amount or percentages j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one to be given to each team in the region not competing in the team into a seeded district, the district teams shall conduct a tournament; and the disbursement of any proceeds from new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding commissions, parking, advertising and any other revenue decision being not seeded. related to the tournament but not directly related to ticket, k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams program or novelty sales. Resolution as to disputes on any of within a district, the teams in the district shall conduct a new these issues may be facilitated by the Commissioner’s offi ce vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in and if agreement cannot be reached, may be considered by the the district being not seeded. Board of Control. l) Once a vote has been conducted for the district to be seeded, 8) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state all required contests shall be considered to be contracted tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing representatives do not notify all schools in the district of facilities, and community/area support. their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is not A) Selection of Tournament Manager specifi ed, a $1000 default forfeiture fee will be assessed for 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of non-played contests. the school to serve as the manager for each district tournament. II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the region A) Dates for Play tournaments. 1) District tournament play shall begin not later than Monday 2) It is the duty of each district and region tournament manager of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for district tournaments. to invite representatives of the participating teams in the Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament to a meeting held for the purpose of making than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. Tournaments tournament plans. may begin prior to that Monday if all schools concur and all 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform regular season play is ended. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 2) Region tournament play shall begin not later than Tuesday entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for region tournaments. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball,

CCompetition Rules 3) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated ﬁ eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact

o m on the Memorandum Calendar as local conditions permit. Any the KHSAA Scoreboard with the ﬁ nal results following each p exceptions shall be approved by the Commissioner. contest. This is in addition to fulﬁ lling local media requests. The

t i B) Sites for Play receipts of a tournament can be assessed a ﬁ ne (levied against

i o 1) District tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions.

R plan approved by a 2/3 majority vote of the schools eligible to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state

e compete in each district tournament. If a district is unable to tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as s resolve confl ict over the plan, the Commissioner shall establish deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will a plan. direct a drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct 2) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to the state tournament. January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and having B) Tournament Meeting a schedule of ten (10) or more softball games shall be allowed 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each to vote for the district tournament location or participate in the tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times tournament. of the games, and make all other arrangements necessary to 3) Criteria to be considered by the schools for the district conduct the tournament. tournament include but are not limited to: 2) The district meetings shall be held in the school designated as a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar. b) an offi cials dressing room; These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and teams. d) meet the published site selection criteria for softball as posted 3) The Region meeting shall be held on Sunday afternoon on the KHSAA website. immediately following the district tournaments not prior to 2:00 4) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. local time in the school designated as the host. These meetings Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all teams, but not their request through a meeting of the Principals or Designated prior to the completion of all district tournament games. The site Representatives of all schools in the region and shall supply for future regional tournaments is not an issue for this meeting

35 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK unless the Principal or the Designated Representative as listed standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up on the KHSAA website is present for all teams in the region (not team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. limited to the competing teams). c) In a region tournament with participants from three districts, C) Tournament Pairings the draw shall be conducted as follows. The format will 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing follow a standard eight-team bracket with two byes, those for each school. falling into positions 2 and 7. The district winners shall draw 2) District (non-seeded): The pairings for the district tournament for positions 1 and 8 in the bracket. The district winner not shall be made in accordance with the following procedure, with drawing a bye shall draw for a position in slots 3 through all byes being arranged to be in the fi rst round: 6. The district runner-up to the district champion drawing for a) The appropriate bracket shall be used for team placement position in slots 3 through 6 will draw into one of the two according to the number of teams entering the tournament: remaining slots in the bracket opposite the district winner, and (1) For three (3) teams, the bracket is seeded by rule and form the remaining two runner-up teams will be placed opposite BR103 shall be used; their corresponding district winners in the remaining two slots (2) For four (4) teams, the unseeded BR104 shall be used; in the bracket. (3) For fi ve (5) teams, the unseeded BR105 shall be used; d) In a region tournament with participants from two districts, (4) For six (6) teams, the unseeded BR106 shall be used; the draw shall be conducted as follows. The district winners (5) For seven (7) teams, the unseeded BR107 shall be used; will draw for positions 1 and 3 in a standard four-team (6) For eight (8) teams, the unseeded BR108 shall be used; bracket. Each corresponding runner-up team will be placed in (7) If more than eight (8) teams are in the district bracket, the position in the opposite bracket from the district winner. contact the KHSAA offi ces for assistance in utilizing the e) In regions where the drawing of district boundaries result in unseeded BR116 bracket. two or three districts, the Board of Control may approve an b) The participants may determine the order in which the alternate format in order to allow for a full eight-team bracket bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to in the region tournament. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, f) The winner of each region tournament shall advance to the alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw state tournament. to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 5) Semi-State. which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may a) The state shall be divided into eight semi-state areas for both NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. boys and girls play for the fi rst round of the state tournament. c) The participants shall then draw for the non-BYE positions b) Each semi-state game shall be held at a fi eld that meets the in the bracket. For example, in a fi ve team bracket, the draw site specifi cations for holding a semi-state game whether or shall be for positions 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. not the host is playing in the contest. d) The home team shall be determined by the bracket form. c) The winner of each semi-state game advances to the State e) The games of the tournament shall be played in the order Tourament. listed on the bracket unless unanimous agreement is reached d) Unless further altered by the Board of Control, the semi-state among the competing teams due to facility logistics concerns. pairings for six-year period are: f) The district champion and the runner-up of each single SS 2018- 2019- 2020- 2021- 2022- 2023- elimination tournament shall advance to the region 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 1 1 @ 2 4 @ 1 1 @ 3 2 @ 1 1 @ 4 3 @ 1 tournament. 3) District (seeded): After seeding positions have been determined, 2 3 @ 4 2 @ 3 4 @ 2 4 @ 3 3 @ 2 2 @ 4 the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall 3 5 @ 6 8 @ 5 5 @ 7 6 @ 5 5 @ 8 7 @ 5 be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single 4 7 @ 8 6 @ 7 8 @ 6 8 @ 7 7 @ 6 6 @ 8 elimination bracket. The brackets (from top down) are as follows: 5 9 @ 10 12 @ 9 9 @ 11 10 @ 9 9 @ 12 11 @ 9 a) 2 Team - The district tournament shall then be a single game, 10 @ 10 @ 6 11 @ 12 11 12 @ 10 12 @ 11 11 @ 10 12 with the winner being advanced to the region tournament as 16 @ 15 @ the district winner (regardless of the regular season results). 7 13 @ 14 13 13 @ 15 14 @ 13 13 @ 16 13 14 @ 14 @ b) 3 Teams (seeded by rule) – Seed 2 plays 3, Seed 1 plays 8 15 @ 16 15 16 @ 14 16 @ 15 15 @ 14 16 winner of Seed 2 vs. Seed 3 for championship. c) 4 Teams - Seed 1 plays 4, 2 plays 3, winners meet for 6) State. The Commissioner shall conduct a blind draw to determine the pairings for the state tournament. The winner of

CCompetition Rules championship. o each of the sixteen (16) region tournaments shall advance to the m d) 5 Teams - Seed 5 plays 4, 1 plays winner of 5 vs. 4, 2 plays 3, p remaining winners meet for championship. state tournament.

e t 7) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing teams, i e) 6 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of 4 vs.

i o 5, 2 plays winner of 3 vs. 6, remaining winners meet for any bracket not drawn in accordance with the above procedures

may be directed to be corrected, including the replay of contests, R championship. u by the Commissioner’s ofﬁ ce. l f) 7 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of

e s 4 vs. 5, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, remaining winners IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS meet for championship. A) Roster Requirement g) 8 Teams - Seed 1 plays 8, 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 vs. 8 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on winner plays 4 vs. 5 winner, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its remaining winners meet for championship. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. h) The district champion and the runner-up of each single 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and elimination tournament shall advance to the region shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. tournament. 3) On the ﬁ rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked 4) Region: The pairings for the region tournament shall be made in so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised accordance to the following procedure. following this date, thereby creating the ﬁ nal eligibility list for a) The participants may determine the order in which the tournament play. bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw B) Withdrawal after draw to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 1) No school which enters a district, region or state tournament which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may (draws for place) shall withdraw from the tournament or forfeit NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. any of its games, but shall play its entire tournament schedule. b) In a region tournament with participants from four districts, 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region or state tournament the district winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a at any time following the draw for district tournament positions

36 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK or after the pairings have been determined in a seeded district, Tournaments shall have, within the preceding four years, that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. attended the Softball Advance Umpires Camp; C) Photo Requirement 8) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play; Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in 9) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at compliance with published deadlines and directives. the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved D) Per Game Roster/Substitutions by the Commissioner; 1) A school may enter a team composed of twenty-one (21) VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS players in each postseason tournament game from the roster A) Champion submitted online. 1) The champion of each district and region tournament will be the 2) The twenty one (21) players shall be designated each game, team undefeated in a single elimination tournament. and no other players may be in uniform and tournament 2)The champion of the state tournament will be the winning team management may limit the total number of individuals in the in a double elimination tournament. dugouts. B) Trophies and Awards E) Minimum Number of Contests 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament To be eligible to compete in the district, region or state tournament, winner and runner-up. a member school team shall have competed in at least ten games 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the during the regular season. gate receipts of that tournament. V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists A) Umpires for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall shall receive a trophy and twenty-four (24) individual medals. be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). including a Most Valuable Player. B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. tournament. C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason VII) FINANCES, PASSES contests shall be: A) District and Region 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts every four years to be eligible for the four years following the prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the payment made by teams to help offset event costs. KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary for state and regional play in the sports in which such training trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; tournament should be allowed. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or region Commission; tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for makeup clinic; paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a that are approved by the participating teams. sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences game offi cials and trophies. as properly attending; d) The remainder of the profi t shall be divided among the schools 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates participating in the tournament and the non-participating to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive schools in accordance with previously approved plans. this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of e) The host school should be allowed the profi ts made on

CCompetition Rules ofﬁ cials within a particular sport; and programs, concessions, parking, etc.

o m 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 B) State p offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than e 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. The following

t i the published late deadline for licensing year. t allowances will apply if the receipts from the tournament make

i o D) Postseason softball umpires shall meet the following additional them justiﬁ able, otherwise, the Board of Control will determine

R criteria the allowance.

l e 1) Umpires for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition 2) Expenses will be paid for meals, lodging and travel for each s shall be assigned by the Commission; team through breakfast on the day following elimination from 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the the tournament for each team. regional or state tournaments. Exceptions may be approved by 3) The state tournament squad for purposes of reimbursement the Commission; shall be limited to twenty-four (24) persons, including the 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason principal, coaches, team members and other personnel. assignments to district, region and state tournament contests 4) Schools failing to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the through the Assigning Secretary. The fi nal selection shall be Association shall forfeit the lodging allowance. Schools within made by the Commission; forty (40) one-way miles will not be provided a lodging allowance, 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system but will be considered commuting teams. Commuting teams approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least shall be paid an allowance in accordance with pre-tournament two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The instructions. recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season 5) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per evaluations; mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of 5) The resultant rankings of offi cials (fi nal ranked list of scores) is $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT 6) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; Athletic Association shall retain profi ts from each state 6) A crew of three (3) umpires shall be assigned to all postseason tournament. tournament play; 7) The competing teams in the state tournament will be afforded 7) Umpires desiring to be assigned to the Region and State passes to accommodate a traveling party of forty (40), to include

37 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK the school principal(s) and other administrators, the coaching to the resumption of the interrupted game. staff, the team members in uniform (maximum 21) and the 4) If a game is interrupted and unable to be completed, it shall support staff for the team. No additional passes will be issued. be counted against all applicable game limits, including total VIII) SPECIAL TOURNAMENT AND REGULAR SEASON RULES number of games and all pitching restrictions. A) Playing Rules G) Complete Game and Run Rule 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Softball Rules 1) In regular season and postseason, a complete game of 6 1/2 as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, or 7 innings shall be played unless other rules adopted by the governed by State Association adoption provisions in the Board of Control apply to the situation. National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the 2) For all games, regular season and postseason, a ten (10) run Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky differential between teams after fi ve or more complete innings and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. (including after the top half if the home team is ahead) shall 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and constitute a complete game. participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. 3) For all games, regular season and postseason, a fi fteen (15) run B) Specifi cations for Fields and Game Balls differential between teams after three or more complete innings 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards (including after the top half if the home team is ahead) shall for fi elds to be used in tournament play may be developed by constitute a complete game. Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the H) International Tie-Breaker (Regular) Board of Control. 1) The international tie-breaker (ITB) system shall be used in all 2) The twelve (12) inch softball shall be utilized in all regular regular season games if the game is still tied after nine complete season and postseason contests. innings. 3) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a 2) By mutual agreement of the two competing coaches, the ITB ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. may be used in the 8th and 9th innings if the score is tied after D) Time Limit seven complete innings. There shall be no time limit on regular or postseason varsity 2) The provisions of the ITB are: softball contests. a) At the start of each half-inning beginning in the top of the E) Speed-Up Rules 10th (or 8th and 9th by mutual agreement), the offensive All softball contests shall utilize the optional speed-up rules team will begin its turn at bat with the player scheduled to allowed by the National Federation such as courtesy runners for bat ninth in that half inning being placed on second base. the pitcher and catcher upon reaching base and any other speed- If the Pitcher or Catcher is that ninth batter, then a courtesy up rules mandated by the National Federation including a “run runner may be used. A substitute may also be legally inserted rule” where run differential determines the end of the contest. for the runner. F) Interrupted Games 2) The ITB shall not be utilized in postseason play. 1) If a game is interrupted in tournament play or in regular season I) Double First Base play, and is subsequently to be completed, it will be reset at 1) The double fi rst base provisions of the NFHS playing rules the same point, same inning, same out or outs, same balls and shall be utilized in all regualr season games hosted by KHSAA strikes, same batter or number of batter in the batting order. member schools at school owned facilities. 2) If a game is interrupted and cannot be resumed that day, three 2) The double fi rst base provisions of the NFHS playing rules shall choices exist for completing the game: be utilized in all rounds of KHSAA championship play. a) If agreed by both teams, terminate game with score as it J) Pitcher Warm-up Area exists if such is allowable by the playing rules of the NFHS, and 1) If the pitcher’s warm-up area is in live ball territory, only those if such agreement is reach at the site, it shall be considered individuals specifi ed by NFHS playing rules (pitcher - catcher fi nal; - personal protector) may be in the live ball area during any b) If agreed by both teams, resume game at point of interruption warm-up period. at a mutually agreed date and time, provided that the date 2) Only members of the team and adult coaches may serve as and time decision is fi nalized at the site prior to the teams personal protector, and all persons serving in that role shall departing, and if such agreement is reach at the site, it shall wear a properly fi tted helmet. be considered fi nal; or K) Heat Index c) If agreement cannot be reached, resume the game on the All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For

CCompetition Rules next available playing date for both teams that does not postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager

o m conﬂ ict with speciﬁ c local board policies (i.e. Sunday play), to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to p does not violate the Bylaw 23 prohibition on playing games the KHSAA.

t i on consecutive days (Monday through Thursday) and based L) Deadline to Start Contest

i o on schedules as published as of the interrupted game. If one No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00

R of the competing teams on the ﬁ rst available date chooses for p.m. local time at any contest site.

e any reason not to play, that team shall be considered to have s forfeited the contest. If both teams choose not to play on the fi rst available date, the contest shall be offi cially recorded as a double forfeit and if it is a seeded district game, the required procedure utilized to determine counting toward seeding position. 3) If a game is interrupted and is to be resumed: a) The same offi cials are expected to return to complete contest; b) Substitute offi cials shall be paid the local policy board mileage add-on only; c) Local associations shall develop policy on compensation of substitute offi cials, such as pooling game fees, etc.; d) Offi cials have no say in the postponement decisions, except to moderate discussion; e) Offi cials and coaches should involve not solely coaches, but school administrators in the decision; f) All involved shall remember that this situation is caused by elements such as weather that are uncontrollable by anyone, and keep the discussions in that perspective; and g) There shall be no guarantee that infi eld will take place prior

38 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES participating in the meet as to the time and place of the meet, Governing Swimming & Diving to supply him or her with entry material and instructions, to (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) invite their participation, and make all arrangements to conduct (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to the meet. the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor for failure to comply with these provisions. separate postseason competition in swimming for boys and 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state girls, provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership meet and may appoint as many assistant managers as deemed and such is approved by the Board of Control. necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will direct 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic all of the business necessary to conduct the state tournament. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3) The entire alignment shall be reviewed when the Board of A) Roster Requirement Control conducts a realignment related to swimming. 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and website and is updated as information changes as provided by shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. the membership with regard to participation. 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised A) Dates for Play following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control tournament play. shall determine the dates of the region and state meets. 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a 2) All meets shall be held within the dates indicated on the documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the B) Individual Entry Requirements Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating 1) To be eligible to compete in the region or state meet, a school representatives. contestant shall have competed in a minimum of four(4) meets 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will involving a minimum of two schools on a team representing a be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. member school during the regular season. B) Sites for Play 2) Athletes competing in high school races (grades 9-12) and 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region participating with a high school as a representative of that meet sites. school irrespective of level of the meet, shall be allowed to 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after count that meet toward the four meet minimum. consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The 3) Athletes desiring to enter the Diving competition shall have prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to competed in Diving during at least four high school meets on a seating and parking facilities and such other information as may team representing a member school during the regular season. be requested by the Commissioner. Such participation shall be verifi ed to the region manager using 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection the required KHSAA forms. Athletes entering high school meets plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining where only Diving is contested or meets where that school’s the sites. only participation is Diving may count that participation against 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to the required four (4) meets and the school does not have to January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already count that particular meet against its maximum number of having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed meets allowed under Bylaw 23. to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be 3) Coaches should maintain and have available copies of all results

CCompetition Rules for the region manager to verify in case of a challenge to the

o allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan. m 5) If a region is unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the required participation minimums by any athlete. Such individual p meet veriﬁ cation (results) may be recorded on standard forms e Commissioner shall establish a plan.

t i distributed by the Association in lieu of keeping individual

i 6) All hosts granted an event shall host at least one meet during o results. n the region meet year with at least ﬁ ve schools entering

R C) Team Entry and Advancement u competitors and using the electronic entry and results system.

e 1) The initial entry report for contestants in the region meet shall

s All host courses shall be properly marked per NFHS rules if the markings are not able to be affi xed to the ground. The region be submitted not later than 5:00 p.m. four (4) days prior to the host school shall own a current license to the Association region meet. designated software application for managing region entries 2) All entries in KHSAA postseason play shall be done electronically and results or shall contract with a current license holder. using the Association designated software application not later 7) The region host school shall own a current license to the than one week prior to the start of the region meet. Association designated software application for managing 3) A school may enter as many as four contestants in each event region entries and results or shall contract with a current license at the region meet except for the relay events. holder. 4) A school may enter only one relay team in each relay event at 8) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals the region meet. after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall 5) Only in the case of documented medical emergency can these be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and deadlines be waived or a substitution be allowed. community/area support. 6) Each manager is responsible for the forwarding of the entries for the region meet to all competing teams. III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS D) Advancement to State Meet A) Selection of Tournament Manager 1) The top two fi nishers in each event from each region meet shall 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the qualify for the state meet. region meets, and shall serve as the manager for the state meet. 2) The next twenty-two (22) at-large times from each event, or The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant managers as highest scores in the case of diving shall qualify for the State deemed necessary to manage the event. meet. 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools 39 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK E) Substitutions these rules. 1) Any otherwise eligible contestant whose name is on the entry B) Specifi cations for Swim Venues blank may be substituted for the original entry prior to the time The specifi cations for recommended and required standards that heats are set up for the region meet. The region manager for swim venues to be used in postseason competition may be shall establish this deadline. developed by Association staff and Advisory Committees and 2) There are no substitutes for individual event qualifi ers to the approved by the Board of Control. state meet. C) Events 3) In the State Meet, relay teams need not be composed of the All meets will have the following events: 200 Yard Medley Relay, same contestants as those in the region meet. 200 Yard Freestyle, 50 Yard Freestyle, 200 Yard Individual Medley, 4) In relay events, eight (8) individuals may be listed as entries, 1 Meter Diving, 100 Yard Butterfl y, 100 Yard Freestyle, 100 Yard any four (4) of which shall be assigned to swim. Participating Backstroke, 500 Yard Freestyle, 100 Yard Breaststroke, 400 Yard in the preliminary or fi nal round of an event shall count as an Freestyle Relay and 200 Freestyle Relay. event toward this limitation. D) Wedges V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS Starting wedges are neither permitted nor utlized for postseason A) Regular Season Competition (region or state) competition. It is strongly recommended that a KHSAA licensed offi cial be present at each Swim meet that counts toward the limit of meets in accordance with Bylaw 23. B) Postseason Competition 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007) and within the published guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. 2) The local management of the postseason swim meets shall have the authority to hire and utilize all licensed offi cials necessary for properly conducting the meets. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS A) Champion 1) All entrants from a school fi nishing in the fi rst sixteen (16) places in each event shall accumulate team points toward the team championship. 4) The champion of each meet will be the team compiling the highest total score. B) Trophies and Awards 1) Region. a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up . b) Awards will be given to top six (6) fi nishing in each event at the region meet. c) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the gate receipts of that meet. 2) State. a) Trophies will be awarded to the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, third and fourth at the state tournament. b) Awards will be given to the top eight (8) individuals fi nishing in each event at the state meet. c) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals at the state tournament. VII) FINANCES, PASSES

CCompetition Rules A) Region

o m 1) The ﬁ nances of the region meet will be managed at the region

e level.

i t 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of

n net proﬁ t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to

R any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment

l e made by teams to help offset event costs. s B) State 1) The Association will ﬁ nance the state tournament. 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors participating in the state meet. VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES A) Playing Rules 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Swimming Rules as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, governed by State Association adoption provisions in the National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. 3) The Board of Control shall serve as the Games Committee as designated by the NFHS Swimming Rules. The Board shall through its normal procedures, receive input from the Commissioner’s Advisory Committee and all other internal opportunities prior to ﬁ nalizing any decision in compliance with

40 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES for failure to comply with these provisions. Governing Tennis B) Pairings (Adopted by the Board of Control for all play in this sport) 1) For the individual region singles and doubles tournaments, the (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to manager may seed the contestants and draw for the remaining the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be places in the tournament. appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the 2) For individual region singles and doubles tournaments, there implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c should be 1 seeded player for every four players entered (1 to 4). rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) 3) The regional draw/meeting should follow the regulations as set forth by the USTA Friend of Court for seed lines and draw I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS procedure. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play 4) For the individual region singles and doubles tournaments, 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor singles players and doubles teams from the same school shall separate postseason competition for boys and girls in tennis, be placed in opposite brackets. provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and 5) For the individual state singles and doubles tournaments, the such is approved by the Board of Control. Commissioner shall supervise the seeding of the brackets in all 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic tournaments, and supervise a draw for the remaining places in sections with the approval of the Board of Control. the tournament. No active coach may be involved in the seeding 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective process. with the 2014-2015 school year and every four years thereafter. 6) Seeding shall be based on the All Factors Method, considering 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled each entrants’ chances of winning the tournament and shall on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. consider all reasonably available information, including ranking 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA lists, standing lists, recent records, types of surface, and website and is updated as information changes as provided by particularly head-to-head encounters. the membership with regard to participation. 7) For individual state singles and doubles tournaments, there II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION should be 1 seeded player for every eight players entered. A) Dates for Play 8) Per the Listing Seeds description in the USTA Friend of Court 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control guidance, seeds 1-4 shall be listed individually, and seeds 5-8 shall determine the dates of the region, semi-state and state shall be grouped. meets. 9) The Main draw, based initially on the Positioning Seeds guidance 2) All meets shall be held within the dates indicated on the from the USTA Friend of Court, shall ensure that Seed 1 is placed Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the on line 1, seed 2 on line 64, 3 and 4 drawing at random for lines Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating 17 or 48, and then seeds 5-8 placed at random for line 9, 25, 40 school representatives. or 56. This draw ensures that seeded players do not meet until 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will the third round of championship play. be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. 10) During initial placement, the draw shall be adjusted to ensure B) Sites for Play that competitiors from the same school are not in the same 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region bracket half. sites. 11) The seeding and the remainder of the draw shall be done 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after by a Committee appointed by the Commissioner involving consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The USTA designees, KHSAA staff and the nonschool affi iliated prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to tournament management. Any active coach may not be a part seating and parking facilities and such other information as may of the seeding / draw process. be requested by the Commissioner. 12) The Commissioner shall ensure a public announcement of the 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection seeded players in all brackets and of the draw. plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining 13) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing the sites. individuals or teams, any bracket not drawn in accordance with 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to the above procedures may be directed to be corrected, including January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already the replay of contests, by the Commissioner’s offi ce. having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed

CCompetition Rules IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS o to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be m A) Roster Requirement p allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan. 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on

t 5) If a region is unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the i the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its

t i Commissioner shall establish a plan. o online participation tracking system by the published deadlines.

6) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state R 2) This roster may be revised during the regular season up to the u tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation,

e point where the draw/seeding for regional tournament brackets s and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing are conducted and shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. facilities, and community/area support. 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS AND PAIRINGS so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised A) Selection of Tournament Manager following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the tournament play. region tournaments, and shall serve as the manager for the 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a state tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. assistant managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. 5) Coaches must submit the requisite form (TN104) before the 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools regiona draw/seeding meeting, listing the ranked order of participating in the tournament as to the time and place of individuals that meet all eligibility requirements for entry into the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material postseason play. and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all B) Individual Entry Requirements arrangements to conduct the tournament. 1) To be eligible to compete in the region or state matches, a 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform contestant shall have competed in a minimum of four (4) the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / matches representing a member school during the regular entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according season. Coaches should maintain and have available copies of to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the all results for the region manager to verify in case of a challenge tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a to the required participation minimums by any athlete. tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) 2) All matches played in a tournament during the season count

41 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK as one match of the four (4) required to qualify for region play. VII) FINANCES, PASSES 3) Using the Association prescribed entry forms, a school may A) Region/Semi-state enter a maximum of two singles players and two doubles teams 1) The fi nances of the region tournament will be managed at the in the individual singles and doubles region tournaments. region level. 4) No contestant shall compete in both the singles and doubles 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of competition. net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to 5) Members playing in the singles and doubles may represent the any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment member school in the team championship series. made by teams to help offset event costs. C) Individual Advancement to State Meet 3) The fi nances of the Team semi-state tournament will be 1) The champion, runner-up and other two semi-fi nalists in both managed at the local semi-state level. the singles and doubles region tournaments shall qualify for B) State the individual State Singles and Doubles Tournaments (top 4 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. fi nishers from each region. 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors 2) Players shall participate in all rounds of region tournament participating in the state tournament. play to be eligible for individual singles and doubles state VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES tournaments. A) Playing Rules D) Substitutions 1) All Tournaments shall be played using the rules as established 1) Region Substitutions by the United State Tennis Association unless modifi ed by the a) Any player whose name is on the offi cial roster may be KHSAA. substituted on a team prior to the time of the draw for the 2) Additional rules otherwise developed by the KHSAA may region tournament. be implemented in contests played in Kentucky and will be b) After the region draw is fi nal, the region tournament distributed to the membership when relevant. manager may allow substitution in singles or doubles only 3) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and if the original entry is prevented from participating due to participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. circumstances due to injury/illness. No advantage may be 4) All team match play shall be best two out of three sets with the gained by a substitution or it will not be permitted. third set being a 10-point tie break. 2) State Substitutions B) Specifi cations for Tennis Courts a) Prior to the fi rst match at the state tournament, the The specifi cations for recommended and required standards for tournament manager may allow substitution on a doubles tennis facilities to be used in tournament play may be developed team if the original entry is prevented from participating due by Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by to circumstances due to injury/illness. No advantage may be the Board of Control. gained by a substitution or it will not be permitted. C) Dress Code b) After the fi rst match has begun at the state tournament, there 1) It is recommended that players wear school uniforms during cannot be a subtitution on a doubles team. play. c) There cannot be a substitute for a singles player at any time 2) The following shall NOT be allowed during tournament play: during the state tournament. a) Visible undergarments under either shorts, skirts or shirts. d) Any withdrawal of a non-seeded player prior to tournament Note: Compression shorts, if worn as an undergarment above play shall result in leaving the player in the draw and the knee, are legal. advancing the opponent by withdrawal. b) Bare midriffs. V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS c) Any garment or hat advertising alcohol, drugs, tobacco Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition products or other inappropriate items deemed objectionable shall be selected by the Association staff in consultation with the by the KHSAA State Tournament Director. Kentucky Tennis Association representatives. d) Objectionable permanent body markings (tattoos) shall be VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS covered; non-permanent body markings (temporary tattoos or A) Individual Play (Singles/Doubles) body paint) shall be prohibited. 1) All individual matches (singles and doubles) shall be played e) Black-soled shoes are prohibited. using a match (2 of 3 sets) format with the third set being a D) Limit of Coaches 10-point tie break. More than one coach coaching at the same time during the same

CCompetition Rules 2) The region champion in the individual singles and doubles match is prohibited.

o m tournaments shall be the singles player or doubles team E) Coach Communication p 1) The following standards are required for coach communication: e undefeated in a single elimination bracket.

t i a) The head coach or one assistant coach designated by the t 3) The state champion in the individual singles and doubles

i o school may talk to the players and this is only allowed n tournaments shall be the singles player or doubles team

R undefeated in a single elimination bracket. between points and during an authorized rest/break period

l e B) Team Championship and should not delay play. Coaching is NOT permitted when s 1) Region the player changes ends during a tie-break game or during a) Points are awarded from each advancement by a singles and any warm-up period. doubles player. b) Once all championship tournament play is inside the Stadium b) The state team champion shall be the team accumulating the Courts, all coaching shall be done on the court. Coaching from most points. outside the court will be prohibited. C) Trophies and Awards c) Coaches may walk onto/enter the court to coach at the 1) Region. designated appropriate times. Players shall stay on the court a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up at with coaches during this communication. each region. d) The 90-second period for coaching begins immediately b) Awards will be given to winner through quarterfi nalist at following the last game point, not when conversation begins. each region meet. e) During the designated coaching breaks, a player may confer 2) State. with his/her coach. Both singles players and both doubles a) Trophies will be awarded to the teams fi nishing fi rst and teams SHALL be at their respective baselines ready to play at second, and the semi-fi nalists at the state tournament (these the conclusion of the 90-second period. If the break period is four teams are made up of the semi-state winners). NOT adhered to, the following penalties will be applied: b) Awards will be given to the winner through quarterfi nalist in (1) Both players not ready to play – The server starts the next Singles and doubles play at the state meet. game 0-30. c) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and awards (2) The server is not ready to play – The server starts the next at the state tournament. game 0-30.

42 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK (3) The receiver is not ready to play – The server starts the next game 30-0. F) Improper Use of Passes Schools found to be issuing coaching passes to unqualifi ed personnel will result in the loss of all coaching passes, except for one head coach, and may result in the disqualifi cation of student participant(s). G) Tardiness For the State Tournament - Tardiness for Match Participation Rule: 5 minutes or less tardy – Loss of toss and loss of one game 5:01 minutes to ten minutes tardy – Loss of toss and loss of two games 10:01 minutes to fi fteen minutes tardy – Loss of toss and loss of three games More than fi fteen minutes tardy - Default H) Continuous Play at State Tournament 1) Continuous play will be in effect for the fi rst two sets with a ten minute break allowed. 2) A two minute break is allowed between the fi rst and second sets. 3) There is no rest period after the fi rst game of any set. 4) The KHSAA will work cooperatively with representatives of the Kentucky Medical Association and the Kentucky Tennis Association to implement provisions of the USTA Rest Period rule should the tournament format dictate such implementation. I) Inclement Weather at the State Tournament 1) In the event inclement weather occurs during the state tournament, and in the opinion of the state manager as approved by the Commissioner, it is in the best interest of completing the event within the time schedule to shorten specifi c matches, a No-Ad system of scoring can be used. 2) Once implemented, the system will be used at the discretion of the manager, all matches in a quartile (group of four matches in round 1, or 2 matches in round 2) shall be played using the same format. If this occurs, such may continue to be implemented until a time when the regular schedule of matches can resume. J) Heat Index All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA. K) Deadline to Start Contest No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 p.m. local time at any contest site.

CCompetition Rules

43 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining Governing Track and Field the sites. (Adopted by the Board of Control) 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan. rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) 5) If a region is unable to resolve confl ict over a plan, the I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS Commissioner shall establish a plan. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play 6) All hosts granted an event shall host at least one meet during the 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor region meet year with at least fi ve schools entering competitors postseason competition in track and fi eld for boys and girls, and using the electronic entry and results system. provided that there is suffi cient interest of the membership to 7) All host sites shall adhere to the required postseason site participate in said competition. specifi cations as adopted by the Board of Control. 2) Member schools desiring to participate in KHSAA sponsored 8) The region host school shall own a current license to the postseason competition shall notify the Association offi ce prior Association designated software application for managing to September 1. region entries and results or shall contract with a current license 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective holder. with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. 9) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce, with new be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and schools with a four-year average enrollment of less than 611 community/area support. students being placed in Class 1A, 611 to 1050 in Class 2A and III) MEET MANAGERS above 1050 in Class 3A. A) Selection of Tournament Manager 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the website and is updated as information changes as provided by region meets, and shall serve as the manager for the state meet. the membership with regard to participation. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant managers as B) Enrollment and Criteria for Determining Classes deemed necessary to manage the event. 1) The classifi cation shall be based on the FOUR-year average 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools total enrollment of students in grades 9-12 including all special participating in the meet as to the time and place of the meet, education students. to supply him or her with entry material and instructions, to 2) The enrollment of schools enrolling only one gender shall be invite their participation, and make all arrangements to conduct doubled for classifi cation purposes. the meet. 3) The enrollment data used to determine the class boundaries 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform shall be obtained from the Kentucky Department of Education or the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / other verifi able sources in the case of nonpublic schools. entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according 4) Schools playing up into a higher classifi cation that the four-year to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the average enrollment dictates shall remain that higher class for tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a the duration of the alignment. tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) 5) The state shall be initially divided into three classes based on a for failure to comply with these provisions. four-year average enrollment, with each class containing seven IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS (7) regions. A) Roster Requirement 6) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic sections 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on within three (3) enrollment based classes with the approval of the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its the Board of Control. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. 7) For the current four-year alignment period, the schools shall be 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and divided to where approximately 40% of those offering track and shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. fi eld are placed in Class 1A, the next 30% in Class 2A an the 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked

CCompetition Rules so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised

o next 30% in Class 3A. m 8) After the initial division, any schools offering Cross Country following this date, thereby creating the ﬁ nal eligibility list for

p e but not offering track are placed in the appropriate class based tournament play.

t 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a

i on comparison of that school’s enrollment, and the largest and o documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. n smallest of each class.

R B) Individual Entry Requirements u II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION

l e 1) A school may enter any eligible student-athlete from the

s A) Dates for Play 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control electronic roster in the postseason region meet. All entries in shall determine the dates of the region and state meets. KHSAA postseason play shall be done electronically using the 2) All meets shall be held within the dates indicated on the Association designated software application. Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the 2) To be eligible to compete in the region or state meet, a Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating contestant shall be enrolled in the seventh (7th) grade or higher school representatives. and be otherwise eligible by all KHSAA Bylaws. 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will 3) To be eligible to compete in the region or state meet in all be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. events with the exception of Pole Vault, a contestant shall have B) Sites for Play competed in at least four meets (indoor or outdoor) involving 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region a minimum of two schools on a team representing a member meet sites. school during the regular season. For all events except for Pole 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after Vault, such participation requirement is not event specifi c. consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The 4) Schools desiring to enter athletes in the Pole Vault, shall have prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to proof of completion of the Pole Vault Coaching Certifi cation seating and parking facilities and such other information as may Course managed through www.pvscb.com, or the course be requested by the Commissioner. All host sites shall comply managed by the NFHS on NFHSLearn.com on or before the fi rst with any adopted site specifi cations as published on the KHSAA pole vault competition of the current year. Such certifi cation website. shall be current and shall be maintained when certifi cation 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection periods change. Only those coaches who have successfully 44 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK completed the Pole Vault course and designated by the school shall qualify for the state meet. as a coach may utilize any coaching box or additional coaching 2) In the event that the format for advancement to the state meet privilege afford to coaches by NFHS rules. qualifi es sixteen (16) or less competitors to each event, a set 5) Athletes desiring to enter the Pole Vault shall have competed in of automatic qualifying standards shall be developed, and any Pole Vault at least four high school meets on a team representing other contestant not otherwise qualifying in (1) above that a member school during the regular season. Such participation meets the published time standards in accordance with the shall be verifi ed to the region manager using the required published guidelines shall also qualify for the state meet. KHSAA forms. Athletes entering high school meets where only E) Substitutions: the Pole Vault is contested or meets where that school’s only 1) Any contestant whose name is on the entry form may be participation is Pole Vault may count that participation against substituted for the original entry at a region meet, prior to the the required four (4) meets and the school does not have to deadline for scratch/add. count that particular meet against its maximum number of 2) After the region meet deadline, the manager may only allow the meets allowed under Bylaw 23. substitution if the original entry is prevented from participating 6) Athletes competing in high school meets (grades 9-12) and in the event because of circumstances beyond their control and participating with a high school as a representative of that school with medical documentation. irrespective of level of the meet shall be allowed to count that 3) There are no substitutions at the State Meet. meet toward the four meet minimum. Coaches should maintain V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS and have available copies of all results for the region manager A) Regular Season Competition to verify in case of a challenge to the required participation 1) It is strongly recommended that a KHSAA licensed offi cial (Track minimums by any athlete. Such individual meet verifi cation and Field), be present at each Track meet that counts toward the (results) may be recorded on standard forms distributed by the limit of meets in accordance with Bylaw 23. Association in lieu of keeping individual results. 2) In any meet where more than four (4) schools are entering C) Team Entry and Advancement teams or individuals, there shall be a KHSAA licensed Track 1) The electronic entry for contestants in the region meet shall offi cial. be submitted not later than 9:00 p.m. four (4) days prior to the B) Regular and Postseason Referees for Track and Field/ Cross fi rst day of preliminaries. For those regions holding preliminary Country (including the starter as referenced) shall meet the competition in Pole Vault or other events at a different time, the following criteria: entry deadline will be not less than four (4) days prior to that 1) It is strongly recommended that a KHSAA licensed offi cial (Track date for those events. and Field), be present at each Cross Country and Track and Field 2) By 9 p.m., three (3) days prior to the region meet, the manager meet that counts toward the limit of meets in accordance with shall distribute a preliminary Performance Listing to all coaches Bylaw 23. In any meet where more than four (4) schools are in the region, shall also submit the list via the UK listserve, and entering teams or individuals, there shall be a KHSAA licensed shall also submit to KHSAA for posting on website. Track offi cial; 3) By 9 p.m., two (2) days before the region, all coaches desiring 2) The local management of the postseason track and fi eld, to challenge a particular time shall have notifi ed the region and cross country meets shall have the authority to hire and manager as to the objection, and the region manager shall utilize all licensed offi cials necessary for properly conducting thereafter resolve and determine the entry time. the meets. Where possible, these managers are encouraged to 4) By 9 p.m., one (1) day prior to the region meet, the manager utilize KHSAA licensed track offi cials. In Track and Field meets shall distribute a fi nal Performance Listing to all coaches in the where more than four (4) teams are participating, a KHSAA region, shall also submit the list via the UK listserve, and shall licensed offi cial shall be used; also submit to KHSAA for posting on website. 3) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition 5) Only in the case of documented medical emergency can these shall be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the deadlines be waived or a substitution be allowed. Federal Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007) and within the 6) Each manager is responsible for the forwarding of the entries published guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. for the region meet to all competing teams. 4) The local management of the postseason track meets shall have 7) An entry with no time entered for an athlete may be challenged. the authority to hire and utilize all licensed offi cials necessary 8) The KHSAA impose a fi ne of $100 against any school attempting for properly conducting the meets. to enter athletes after any published deadline. 5) For the State Track and Field, and Cross Country meets, the

CCompetition Rules 9) A school may enter one or two contestants in each individual Commission shall have the authority to hire and utilize all

o m event and one team in each relay race at the region meet. ofﬁ cials necessary for properly conducting the meets. Where p 10) Eight participants may be named to a relay team, any four of possible, the Association shall utilize KHSAA licensed track

t i whom may be used in the preliminaries or in the ﬁ nals. The same ofﬁ cials for the state meets;

i o eight individuals are the only athletes eligible to be entered in 6) Final approval for all selections to the meets shall be made by

R that relay race at the state meet. Coaches should list a maximum the Commission;

u l of eight individuals on the relay entry, and then shall declare e 7) It is strongly recommended that Track and Field offi cials hold s the runners that will run prior to each race. The same eight dual certifi cation with United States of America Track and Field individuals are the only athletes eligible to be entered in that (USATF);and race at the state meet. Listing on the entry does not count as 8) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason one of their events unless they actually report to the clerk. Being play. Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall listed as an alternate does not count as one of the events for the be at the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be athlete against the four-event limit. Only those relay contestants approved by the Commissioner. who actually participate will be considered offi cial entries. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS 11) In any meet, a contestant shall not compete in more than A) Champion four events. Any number of these events may be relays. If a 1) All entrants from a school accumulate team points toward the competitor exceeds participation limits, they shall forfeit all team championship. individual and team points earned in any event and shall be 2) Six (6) places shall count in scoring in each event at the region disqualifi ed from further participation in that meet. meets with values of 10-8-6-4-2-1. D) Advancement to State Meet 3) Eight (8) places shall count in scoring in each event at the state 1) The State Meet shall include in each event, twenty-four meet with values of 10-8-6-5-4-3-2-1. competitors, and any person tied for the twenty-fourth 4) The champion of each meet will be the team compiling the qualifying position. highest number of points in each meet. a) The top two competitors in each event at the region meet B) Trophies and Awards shall automatically qualify for the state meet. 1) Region. b) The next ten best times/heights/marks from the state-at-large a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up at

45 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK each region. to make sure they are secure. Anything worn on the head b) Awards will be given to fi rst six (6) fi nishers in each event at shall be secure, designed for the head, and without a visible each region meet. manufacturer’s logo or other decoration (other than the c) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the school name / nickname). gate receipts of that meet. b) TOPS - If shirts are worn under the school issued jersey by 2) State. more than one team member (two or more), that apparel a) Trophies will be awarded to the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, shall be exactly the same single solid color on all who choose third and fourth at the state meet. to wear the undergarments. It is not necessary that all team b) Awards will be given to the fi rst eight (8) placers in each members wear them. No lettering or designs or decals will event at the state meet. be allowed on undershirts anywhere with the exception of c) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the a single manufacturer’s logo which shall adhere to the NFHS gate receipts of that meet. restrictions. The restrictions on undershirts do not include VII) FINANCES, PASSES sleeve length. For example one team member can wear long A) Region sleeves, one 3/4 sleeves and one short sleeves as long as they 1) The fi nances of the region meet will be managed at the region are the same solid color. level. c) BOTTOMS - If leotards, body suits or bike shorts are worn 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of under the school issued running trunks by more than one net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to team member (two or more), that apparel shall be a single any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment solid color and alike in color. Long underwear will not be made by teams to help offset event costs. accepted as a visible undergarment for either tops or bottoms. B) State No lettering, designs or decals will be allowed on underpants 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. anywhere, with the exception of a single manufacturer’s logo 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors which shall meet NFHS restrictions. The restrictions on pants participating in the state meet. do not include pants length. For example one team member VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES can wear long pants, one 3/4 pants and one short pants as A) Playing Rules long as they are the same solid color. 1) All meets shall be contested using the NFHS Track and Field d) UNIFORM VIOLATIONS - If a uniform violation is not detected Rules as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional prior to the start of an event, there can be no disqualifi cation rules, governed by State Association adoption provisions in the for violations. National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the e) HANDS - Gloves or socks may be worn on the hands during Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky cold weather. and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. f) FEET - Shoes shall be worn. Shoes of different runners on the 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and team do not have to be the same make and model. The use participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. of ballet slippers, gymnastic or sweat socks does not meet the 3) The Board of Control shall serve as the Games Committee requirements of this rule. as designated by the NFHS Track and Field Rules. The Board g) JEWELRY – There are no restrictions on jewelry worn during shall through its normal procedures, receive input from the meets. Commissioner’s Advisory Committee and all other internal h) BODY MARKINGS / TATTOOS - A permanent tattoo that is opportunities prior to fi nalizing any decision in compliance with not objectionable in the judgement of an offi cial, would these rules. be allowed. A permanent tattoo that is objectionable in its B) Specifi cations for Track Facilities content or form shall be covered. Anything non permanent The specifi cations for recommended and required standards for including tattoos, face paint, etc. would not be legal if track facilities to be used in tournament play may be developed by visible on any part of the body as it would be excessive body Association staff and Advisory Committees and approved by the decoration. Board of Control. i) SPORTS BRA – These items are considered foundation C) Starter’s Pistol Specifi cations garments and are not to be considered as part of the uniform Any meet, indoors or outdoors, where at FAT system is being used or undergarment rule. my be started by a .32 or .22 caliber starter’s pistol. The pisol shall j) SUNGLASSES- Unless prescribed by a medical doctor for the

CCompetition Rules meet all district, local, state and federal regulations including purpose of vision correction, sunglasses may not be worn

o m possession ordinances and registration requirements. during competition. p k) HIP NUMBERS – UNIFORM – When hip numbers are worn for e D) Interrupted Meets

t i purpose of assisting the automated timing system in region t When lightning or other inclement weather, heat and humidity

i o conditions or other events beyond the control of meet and state competition, the uniform topped shall be tucked

R management, cause the interruption of a meet by the Meet into the shorts when the competitors are at the start.

u l F) Events e Referee after it has begun, and the determination has been made s that it cannot be resumed at the point of interruption, it shall be 1) All boys’ region meets as well as the state meet shall have the considered to be complete with respect to the counting against following events: 110 Meter High Hurdles, 100 Meter Dash, the maximum number of meets for a school or minimum number 4 x 200 Meter Relay, 1600 Meter Run, 4 x 100 Meter Relay, of required meets for an athlete. In addition, it shall be complete 400 Meter Dash, 300 Meter Low Hurdles, 3200 Meter Run, 800 to the extent of the compensation for meet offi cials. Meter Run, 200 Meter Dash, 4x400 Meter Relay, 4x800 Meter E) UNIFORM ALLOWANCES PER NFHS TRACK RULE 3 Relay, Shot Put, Discus, Pole Vault, Triple Jump, Long Jump, High 1) All contestants in Track shall adhere to National Federation Rule Jump. 4-3 as it relates to the uniform of the competitors. In addition, 2) All girls’ region meets as well as the state meet shall have the the Games Committee for the State Cross Country and Track following events: 100 Meter Low Hurdles, 100 Meter Dash, 4 Meets may, within the allowable limits of Rule 4-3, establish x 200 Meter Relay, 1600 Meter Run, 4 x 100 Meter Relay, 400 clarifi cations and enhancements to the uniform requirement to Meter Dash, 300 Meter Low Hurdles, 3200 Meter Run, 800 ensure equal treatment of all competitors. Meter Run, 200 Meter Dash, 4x400 Meter Relay, 4x800 Meter 2) The following areas have been addressed for consistent Relay, Shot Put, Discus, Long Jump, High Jump, Pole Vault, Triple enforcement by meet offi cials and which are applicable to Jump. all contestants. NOTHING ABOUT THESE RULES MANDATE A 3) These events shall be conducted in metric measurements when REQUIRED COLOR): possible. The traditional English measurements may be used a) HEADS - Hats are not allowed however the toboggan or when necessary. National Federation Track and Field Rules shall stocking cap/wrap are permitted in cold or hot weather. All govern the competition. head gear and holders shall be checked by the Meet Referee G) Region Meet Entry Mark (Seeding) Requirements

46 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK 1) All coaches shall be able to verify times that are entered for an fail to break the tie according to the National Federation Rule athlete in the region meet. Book; competitors tying for second in the region shall advance 2) Entry times for the region meet may be FAT (Fully Automated to the state meet. All region meets and the state meet shall Timing) or HT (Hand Times). All HT times shall be properly be conducted utilizing fully automated timing. In the event that converted per NFHS Rule 3-9-4. If any HT is recorded in the timing system fails for any reason, the NFHS provision for hundredths, it shall be rounded up to the nearest tenth of a adjusting marks to be comparable shall be utilized. second, and properly noted as a HT. I) State Meet Automatic Qualifying Standards and Starting Heights 3) Any time which cannot be verifi ed, cannot be used. 1) In the event that the format for advancement to the state meet 4) The only acceptable verifi cation of meet results will be qualifi es sixteen (16) or less competitors to each event, a set of submission to the KHSAA website. automatic qualifying standards shall be developed. In this case, 5) Only meet results posted using Hytek Meet Manager Software an athlete achieving the qualifying mark at the regional meet and its formatting will be used for the purpose of seeding the would automatically qualify for the state meet, if not among the region. In this manner, a statewide listing of performances can competitors qualifying in any other manner. be maintained by multiple sources to validate seed times. 2) In the event that the format for advancement to the state meet 6) Only meets contested up until the day before entries are due qualifi es more than sixteen (16) competitors for each event, no will be used for the purpose of seeding the region. While other automatic qualifying standards will be used. meets may be held per Bylaw 23, those meets may be used to 3) If automatic qualifying standards are used due to the number satisfy the 4 meet minimum, but not used toward seeding. of athletes per event qualifying for the state meet, the following H) Region Meet Format and Rules provisions shall be used: 1) To ensure competitive balance between the potential at-large a) Automatic Qualifying Standards are determined by the qualifi ers to the state meet, all region meets in a given Class average fi fth place time the last fi ve years of State Meets. shall follow the same time schedule. b) The calculated FAT time standards represent the actual fi ve- 2) Regions running multiple meets at the same site will be required year average. to run them consecutively, not concurrently. c) Automatic Qualifying HAFT Standards are derived by taking 3) The fast heat/section in all races shall be full (use all lanes), the fi ve-year average electronic (FAT) time, reducing it by .24 even if this leaves a single competitor in the slower heat. and then rounding to the next tenth in compliance with Track 4) Each of the region meets will be conducted in one session and Rule 3-9. use the same standard schedule including fi eld events. The d) High Jump qualifying marks are rounded up to the nearest 2 Pole Vault may be held at an alternative site at the discretion inch mark above the fi ve-year average for boys. of the tournament manager and with the approval of the e) High Jump qualifying marks are rounded up to the nearest 2 Commissioner. inch mark above the fi ve-year average for girls. 5) The region meets shall be held on Saturday unless there is an f) Pole Vault qualifying marks are rounded up to the nearest 6 agreement among the participating teams to hold the meet inch mark above the fi ve-year average for boys. on an alternate day. If an alternate day is selected, and any g) Pole Vault qualifying marks are rounded up to the nearest 6 school is in session that day, the meet shall be held after 3 p.m. inch mark above the fi ve-year average for girls. Confl icts with graduation ceremonies and the academic school J) State Meet Starting Heights and Marks day should be avoided. 1) Pole Vault starting height at state meet will be 2 feet below 6) By consensus of the schools in the region through communication Class Automatic Qualifying Standard for boys. with the manager, the preliminaries in the Long Jump, Triple 2) Pole Vault starting height at state meet will be 2 feet below Jump, Shot Put and Discus may be conducted using an Open Class Automatic Qualifying Standard for girls. Ring / Open Pit, “Cafeteria Style” format. 3) High Jump starting height at state meet will be 4 inches below a) In doing this, the manager would defi ne a block of time and Class Automatic Qualifying Standard for boys. allow the competitors to check in, perform their trials without 4) High Jump starting height at state meet will be 4 inches below regard to a pre-defi ned order, and return to other events or Class Automatic Qualifying Standard for girls. event venues. 5) Games Committee reserves the right per NFHS rules to adjust b) In order to use this Cafeteria Style, the manager would defi ne starting height due to unforeseen conditions a block of time where trials would be allowed. No more than K) State Meet Format ten (10) minutes following the closing of the pit/ring and the 1) The State Meet will be conducted in one day, with all running

CCompetition Rules announcing of the fi nalists, the fi nals would begin in NFHS events being timed fi nals

m deﬁ ned order. 2) KHSAA staff is to determine class placement and distribute to p 7) The meet shall be scheduled at a time when there is not a schools.

t i conﬂ ict with instructional time at a participating school and 3) There will be no practice date prior to the State Meet

i o all efforts should be made to avoid conﬂ ict with the actual 4) The standard order of events will be followed from the Rules

R graduation exercises. It is impossible to avoid all conﬂ icts, but Book with the fastest section running last

u l managers are to afford member schools the same courtesy they 5) The 4 x 800 relay and 800 meter run will be run in 2 sections,

e s would expect. with 14 in the faster section, and 10 in the slower section 8) Any race where the initial leg (or total race) is 400 meters or 6) The 100/110 Hurdles, 100 Dash, 4x200 Relay, 4 x 100 Relay, 400 less shall be started with blocks, and all competitors shall be Dash, 300 Hurdles, 200 Dash and 4 x 400 Relay will be run in required to properly use them. three sections, with the two fastest sections using all available 9) All individuals placing sixth or higher in each event shall score lanes. team points in the region meet. 7) The 1600 and 3200 runs will be run in one race each. 10) Six places shall count in the scoring in each event at the region 8) The State Meet will utilize at least three fully automatic timing meet with values 10-8-6-4-2-1. systems 11) The meet shall be made up of all of the events on the region L) Sector for Shot Put and Discus entry form. The sector for the Shot Put and Discus shall be marked at 34.92 12) No preliminaries will be conducted. All running events will be degrees. All regular and postseason competition shall utilize this timed-fi nal events, broken into sections according to NFHS rules. sector measurement, whether or not the event is held inside the 13) In the running races where enough competitors are entered to oval. cause the need for sections, the slower runners or relay teams M) Communication Devices shall be placed in the fi rst section, with the faster competitors Unless otherwise legal within the playing rules as adopted by the assigned to the last section (NFHS Rule 5-5-7). NFHS, wireless communication between participants and coaches, 14) The hurdle height for the girls 100m hurdles is 33” and the or the use of wireless communication devices by coaches or height for the boys 300m hurdles is 36” participants is prohibited. This includes participant to participant, 15) In the case of a tie in fi eld events, if all tie breaking procedures coach to participant, and coach to coach.

47 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK N) Heat Index All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA.

CCompetition Rules

48 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES b. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record Governing Volleyball in the fi rst game played against all district opponents (Adopted by the Board of Control) involved in the tie. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to c. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be points allowed in all seeded games shall be the next tie- appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the breaker. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c d. If the tie remains between all three teams, then the total rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) points allowed in the second of each of the seeded games I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS AND SEEDING shall be the next tie-breaker. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play e. If the tie is still unbreakable, then a blind draw among 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor the three teams shall break the tie. In this case, the team postseason competition in volleyball for girls, provided that drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is seed (one seed) approved by the Board of Control. f. Additional tie-breaking mechanisms could be added, and 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic would be uniform for all three-team districts. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. f) In the event of game re-scheduling or cancellation, the original 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective game schedule shall determine which game is “second” for with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. tie-breaking purposes. 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled 3) For district tournaments with four or more teams, the district on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. tournament brackets may be drawn by random lot or placed into 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the bracket using a seeding system. A majority vote (recorded website and is updated as information changes as provided by in writing) of the Principals, Athletic Directors or Designated the membership with regard to participation. Representatives of the schools in the district is required in order B) District Seeding to make or change seeding decisions. In the absence of any 1) For district tournaments that for whatever reason, fall to where documentation, minutes or other verifi cation, the districts shall only two teams the following shall govern: not be seeded. The rules concerning the seeding of a district a) The head to head results from the regular season shall with four or more teams are as follows: determine the host team and number 1 seed for postseason a) The decision to seed and the method used in seeding (including play. all tie-breakers) shall be determined by majority vote of the b) The number 1 seed shall host the district tournament (region if participating teams in the district and the manager shall the sport does not have districts) and shall be the designated record this vote in writing and submit it to the Association. home team, even if unable to host the game at their home site The representatives making the written declaration shall due to facility requirements in the sport. decide all issues related to seeding, 2) For district tournaments with three teams, the district b) Seeding methods shall be determined prior to the start of tournament shall be seeded in accordance with the following the regular season, recorded in writing with a copy provided three-team seeding rules: to the KHSAA, and shall remain in place until a majority vote a) The competing teams within a district shall, by majority vote, of the participating schools rescinds or changes the seeding determine if the schools are required to play each other once decisions. Such changes to the district seeding plan may not or twice during the regular season. These games will produce be made for the current year once play has begun in the a uniform means of ranking the teams by seed within these regular season. districts. c) In the event of dispute, the current copy on fi le with the b) The team with the highest seed (one seed) receives a bye in KHSAA shall prevail in determining resolution. the district tournament, and advances to the championship d) Seeding plans may, at the discretion of the majority vote of game. the schools, stipulate a particular team to a particular seeded c) The remaining two teams would play in the fi rst round of position. the district tournament with the loser of that game being e) It shall be the district tournament manager’s responsibility eliminated. to update the Association with respect to any changes to d) In the case of a two-way tie for the district winning position, the seeding decision or method being used and any relevant

CCompetition Rules tiebreakers. In the absence of this documentation, consultation

t i with interpretation and clariﬁ cation.

i the tied district opponents would have the higher o f) There are no statewide rules on a seeding method once the n ﬁ nishing position.

s between the tied district opponents would have the of matches played within a district provided all teams have higher fi nishing position. played all other teams. In that case, each district shall adopt e) In the case of a three-way tie for the district winning position, tie-breaking procedures in the event that the primary method the tie would be resolved in the following manner. If any of of seeding results in a tie or other situations arise which cause the tie-breakers results in one of the teams being ahead of the an alteration in the scheduled seeding method. Among the other two, the tie is broken. If any of the tie-breakers result more common tie-breaking methods are: in two teams remaining ahead of the third, then the two-way (1) seeding by overall win-loss record; tie breaker shall be used to determine the winner between (2) seeding by win-loss record in specifi c contests, those two. (3) seeding by a rating/ranking from a statewide poll, (1) In districts that have decided to play each other only once (4) seeding by a majority vote, in district play, the tie shall be broken by blind draw. The (5) seeding by a committee, team drawn fi rst in the draw shall be considered the highest (6) seeding a specifi c team(s) into a position to avoid seed (one seed). scheduling complications and issues, and (2) In districts that have decided to play each other twice in (7) seeding by a rating turned in by each school. district play, the tie-breaking mechanisms (in order) shall g) If win-loss records are used for seeding, the records used shall be: be the records as of midnight Wednesday prior to the Monday a. If the tie remains between all three teams, the record of the week of the district tournament. Teams and school in the second game played against all district opponents representatives may meet during the regular season to discuss involved in the tie. tournament operations (i.e. dates, times, sites, tournament 49 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK personnel needs, etc.). However if an organizational meeting information relating to the listed criteria for hosting. The is held prior to the published date on the calendar, no Commissioner’s offi ce may use this site selection plan as a discussions may be held regarding the bracketing or pairings guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining the sites. of specifi c teams unless all mandated seeded matches have 5) A two-thirds vote is necessary to adopt any plan for been played prior to the meeting. recommending the tournament sites and voting shall include h) Seeded matches unable to be played for any reason (with the all schools within a region, not simply the schools playing in a exception of verifi ed forfeited contests) prior to the published particular year’s event. date for the district tournament meetings will be recorded as 6) Criteria to be considered by the schools for recommending a win and a loss for both teams in computing seeded position. regional tournament sites include but are not limited to: i) If a change in the alignment of teams moves a single new a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate team into a previously seeded district during the current past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; school year, the previous decision as to seeding shall prevail. If b) an offi cials dressing room; the new team enters the alignment following the completion c) adequate parking for projected attendance; and of all match contracts and the new team is unable to schedule d) meet the published site selection criteria for volleyball as all required opponents, the new team shall be seeded in the posted on the KHSAA website. last position for the current season, and shall be included in 7) The schools in the district and the region shall agree on the seeded match scheduling for the subsequent seasons. If a amount of proceeds (if any) that is to be kept by the host single change in the alignment occurs prior to the end of the school as well as limitations on expenses by the host school; previous school year, the district teams will conduct a new determining the fi xed amount or percentages to be given to vote as to seeding. each school that participates; the fi xed amount or percentages j) If a change in the alignment of teams moves more than one to be given to each team in the region not competing in the team into a seeded district, the district teams shall conduct a tournament; and the disbursement of any proceeds from new vote as to seeding. A tie vote will result in the seeding commissions, parking, advertising and any other revenue decision being not seeded. related to the tournament but not directly related to ticket, k) If the Board of Control approves a total realignment of teams program or novelty sales. Resolution as to disputes on any of within a district, the teams in the district shall conduct a new these issues may be facilitated by the Commissioner’s offi ce vote as to seeding. A tie vote in this situation shall result in and if agreement cannot be reached, may be considered by the the district being not seeded. Board of Control. l) Once a vote has been conducted for the district to be seeded, 8) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state all required contests shall be considered to be contracted tournament after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, for the seeding requisite number of contests. If school and shall be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing representatives do not notify all schools in the district of facilities, and community/area support. their intent NOT to participate by the fi rst day of practice, the III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS contest shall be played or a forfeit declared. Where a fee is A) Selection of Tournament Manager not specifi ed, a $250 default forfeiture fee will be assessed 1) The principal of the host school shall designate an offi cial of for non-played contests. the school to serve as the manager for each district tournament. II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the region A) Dates for Play tournaments. 1) District tournament play shall begin not later than Monday 2) It is the duty of each district and region tournament manager of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for district tournaments. to invite representatives of the participating teams in the Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament to a meeting held for the purpose of making than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. Tournaments tournament plans. may begin prior to that Monday if all schools concur and all 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform regular season play is ended. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 2) Region tournament play shall begin not later than Tuesday entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according of the week on the KHSAA Calendar for region tournaments. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the Permission may be obtained from the KHSAA offi ce to start later tournament if it is not held at the school. In addition, it shall be than that date only in the event of facility confl icts. the duty of the manager of each contest in baseball, basketball,

CCompetition Rules 3) All tournaments shall be held on or as near the dates indicated ﬁ eld hockey, football, soccer, softball and volleyball to contact

t i B) Sites for Play receipts of a tournament can be assessed a ﬁ ne (levied against

i o 1) District tournament sites shall be selected by a site selection the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions.

R plan approved by a 2/3 majority vote of the schools eligible to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state

e compete in each district tournament. If a district is unable to tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as s resolve confl ict over the plan, the Commissioner shall establish deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will a plan. direct a drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct 2) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to the state tournament. January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and B) Tournament Meeting having a schedule of ten (10) or more volleyball matches shall 1) The representatives of the schools participating in each be allowed to vote for the district tournament location or tournament, by majority vote, shall set the dates and times of participate in the tournament. the matches, and make all other arrangements necessary to 3) Criteria to be considered by the schools for the district conduct the tournament. tournament include but are not limited to: 2) The district meetings shall be held in the school designated as a) satisfactory capacity within the facility to safely accommodate the tournament host not later than the Wednesday prior to the past (fi ve years) and expected attendance numbers; week of the tournament as specifi ed on the KHSAA Calendar. b) an offi cials dressing room; These meetings may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all c) adequate parking for projected attendance; teams. d) meet the published site selection criteria for volleyball as 3) The Region meeting shall be held on Sunday afternoon posted on the KHSAA website. immediately following the district tournaments not prior to 2:00 4) The Commissioner shall determine region tournament sites. local time in the school designated as the host. These meetings Schools interested in hosting a region tournament shall submit may be held earlier by mutual agreement of all teams, but not their request through a meeting of the Principals or Designated prior to the completion of all district tournament matches. The Representatives of all schools in the region and shall supply site for future regional tournaments is not an issue for this

50 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK meeting unless the Principal or the Designated Representative standard eight-team bracket. Each corresponding runner-up as listed on the KHSAA website is present for all teams in the team will draw for a position in the opposite bracket. region (not limited to the competing teams). c) In a region tournament with participants from three districts, C) Tournament Pairings the draw shall be conducted as follows. The format will 1) The principal or his/her representative shall conduct the drawing follow a standard eight-team bracket with two byes, those for each school. falling into positions 2 and 7. The district winners shall draw 2) District (non-seeded): The pairings for the district tournament for positions 1 and 8 in the bracket. The district winner not shall be made in accordance with the following procedure, with drawing a bye shall draw for a position in slots 3 through all byes being arranged to be in the fi rst round: 6. The district runner-up to the district champion drawing for a) The appropriate bracket shall be used for team placement position in slots 3 through 6 will draw into one of the two according to the number of teams entering the tournament: remaining slots in the bracket opposite the district winner, and (1) For three (3) teams, the bracket is seeded by rule and form the remaining two runner-up teams will be placed opposite BR103 shall be used; their corresponding district winners in the remaining two slots (2) For four (4) teams, the unseeded BR104 shall be used; in the bracket. (3) For fi ve (5) teams, the unseeded BR105 shall be used; d) In a region tournament with participants from two districts, (4) For six (6) teams, the unseeded BR106 shall be used; the draw shall be conducted as follows. The district winners (5) For seven (7) teams, the unseeded BR107 shall be used; will draw for positions 1 and 3 in a standard four-team (6) For eight (8) teams, the unseeded BR108 shall be used; bracket. Each corresponding runner-up team will be placed in (7) If more than eight (8) teams are in the district bracket, the position in the opposite bracket from the district winner. contact the KHSAA offi ces for assistance in utilizing the e) In regions where the drawing of district boundaries result in unseeded BR116 bracket. two or three districts, the Board of Control may approve an b) The participants may determine the order in which the alternate format in order to allow for a full eight-team bracket bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to in the region tournament. the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, f) The winner of each region tournament shall advance to the alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw state tournament. to determine the order of draw) or any other method for 5) State. The Commissioner shall conduct a blind draw to which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may determine the pairings for the state tournament. The winner of NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. each of the sixteen (16) region tournaments shall advance to the c) The participants shall then draw for the non-BYE positions state tournament. in the bracket. For example, in a fi ve team bracket, the draw 6) Regardless of any vote or consensus of the competing teams, shall be for positions 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7. any bracket not drawn in accordance with the above procedures d) The home team shall be determined by the bracket form. may be directed to be corrected, including the replay of contests, e) The games of the tournament shall be played in the order by the Commissioner’s offi ce. listed on the bracket unless unanimous agreement is reached IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS among the competing teams due to facility logistics concerns. A) Roster Requirement f) The district champion and the runner-up of each single 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on elimination tournament shall advance to the region the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its tournament. online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. 3) District (seeded): After seeding positions have been determined, 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and the seeded bracket pairings shall be observed. The teams shall shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. be placed in the proper position of the appropriate single 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked elimination bracket. The brackets (from top down) are as follows: so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised a) 2 Team - The district tournament shall then be a single game, following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for with the winner being advanced to the region tournament as tournament play. the district winner (regardless of the regular season results). 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a b) 3 Teams (seeded by rule) – Seed 2 plays 3, Seed 1 plays documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. winner of Seed 2 vs. Seed 3 for championship. B) Withdrawal after draw c) 4 Teams - Seed 1 plays 4, 2 plays 3, winners meet for 1) No school which enters a district, region or state tournament

CCompetition Rules championship. (draws for place) shall withdraw from the tournament or forfeit

o m d) 5 Teams - Seed 5 plays 4, 1 plays winner of 5 vs. 4, 2 plays 3, any of its matches, but shall play its entire tournament schedule. p remaining winners meet for championship. 2) If a school withdraws from a district, region or state tournament

t i e) 6 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of 4 vs. at any time following the draw for district tournament positions

i o 5, 2 plays winner of 3 vs. 6, remaining winners meet for or after the pairings have been determined in a seeded district,

R championship. that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27.

u l f) 7 Teams - Seed 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 plays winner of e C) Photo Requirement s 4 vs. 5, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, remaining winners Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph in meet for championship. compliance with published deadlines and directives. g) 8 Teams - Seed 1 plays 8, 4 plays 5, 2 plays 7, 3 plays 6, 1 vs. 8 D) Per match Roster/Substitutions winner plays 4 vs. 5 winner, 2 vs. 7 winner plays 3 vs. 6 winner, 1) A school may enter a team composed of fi fteen (15) players in remaining winners meet for championship. each postseason tournament match from the roster submitted h) The district champion and the runner-up of each single online. elimination tournament shall advance to the region 2) The fi fteen (15) players shall be designated each match, and no tournament. other players may be in uniform and tournament management 4) Region: The pairings for the region tournament shall be made in may limit the total number of individuals on the benches. accordance to the following procedure. E) Minimum Number of Contests a) The participants may determine the order in which the To be eligible to compete in the district, region or state tournament, bracket positions will be drawn in any manner agreeable to a member school team shall have competed in at least ten (10) the majority. This could be alphabetically by school name, matches during the regular season. alphabetical by some other variable, totally random (a draw V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS to determine the order of draw) or any other method for A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall which agreement is reached. However, such agreement may be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal NOT determine the bracket positions, only the drawing order. Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007). b) In a region tournament with participants from four districts, B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published the district winners will draw for positions 1, 3, 5 and 7 in a guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook.

51 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason VII) FINANCES, PASSES contests shall be: A) District and Region 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts every four years to be eligible for the four years following the prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the payment made by teams to help offset event costs. KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary for state and regional play in the sports in which such training trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; tournament should be allowed. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or region Commission; tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for makeup clinic; paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a that are approved by the participating teams. sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences game offi cials and trophies. as properly attending; d) The remainder of the profi t shall be divided among the schools 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates participating in the tournament and the non-participating to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive schools in accordance with previously approved plans. this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of e) The host school should be allowed the profi ts made on offi cials within a particular sport; and programs, concessions, parking, etc. 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 B) State offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. The following the published late deadline for licensing year. allowances will apply if the receipts from the tournament make D) Postseason volleyball shall meet the following additional criteria: them justifi able, otherwise, the Board of Control will determine 1) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored state championship the allowance. competition shall be assigned by the Commission and shall be 2) Expenses will be paid for meals, lodging and travel for each licensed by the Kentucky High School Athletic Association; team through breakfast on the day following elimination from 2) Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the tournament for each team. the regional, sub-sectional, sectional, semi-state or State 3) The state tournament squad for purposes of reimbursement Tournaments. Exceptions may be approved by the Commission; shall be limited to twenty-four (24) persons, including the 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason principal, coaches, team members and other personnel. assignments to district, region, sectional and state tournament 4) Schools failing to stay in the motel/hotel assigned by the contests through the Assigning Secretary. The fi nal selection Association shall forfeit the lodging allowance. Schools within shall be made by the Commission; forty (40) one-way miles will not be provided a lodging allowance, 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system but will be considered commuting teams. Commuting teams approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least shall be paid an allowance in accordance with pre-tournament two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The instructions. recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season 5) The rate to be reimbursed for state championship play is $1 per evaluations; mile (round trip), $5 per meal per person, and a maximum of 5) The resultant rankings of offi cials (fi nal ranked list of scores) is $13 per person per night for lodging as approved. public information. The individual ratings by coaches are NOT 6) After all expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School public and may not be disclosed under any circumstances; Athletic Association shall retain profi ts from each state

CCompetition Rules 6) Ofﬁ cials desiring to be assigned to the Region and State tournament.

m Tournaments shall have within the preceding four years, 7) The competing teams in the state tournament will be afforded p attended the Volleyball Ofﬁ cials Camp; and passes to accommodate a traveling party of thirty (30), to

t i 7) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play. include the school principal(s) and other administrators, the

i o In all tournament levels; coaching staff, the team members in uniform (maximum 15)

R 8) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at and the support staff for the team. No additional passes will

u l the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved be issued.

e s by the Commissioner. VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS A) Playing Rules A) Champion 1) All matches shall be played using the NFHS Volleyball Rules 1) The champion of each district and region tournament will be the as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, team undefeated in a single elimination tournament. governed by State Association adoption provisions in the 2)The champion of the state tournament will be the winning team National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the in a single elimination tournament. Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky B) Trophies and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. 1) Trophies will be given to each district and region tournament 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and winner and runner-up. participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. 2) The trophies at the district and region shall be paid from the B) Specifi cations for Volleyball Courts and Game balls gate receipts of that tournament. 1) The specifi cations for recommended and required standards 3) The state tournament champion, runner-up, and semi-fi nalists for volleyball facilities to be used in tournament play may be shall receive a trophy and twenty-four (24) individual medals. developed by Association staff and Advisory Committees and 4) An All-Tournament team will be selected at the state tournament approved by the Board of Control. including a Most Valuable Player. 2) The Association may enter into a contract to restrict the use of a 5) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state ball in tournament play to a specifi c brand or model. tournament. C) Match Format 1) Varsity Play, Regular and Postseason Season

52 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK a) The standard format will be best 3 of 5 sets, rally scoring, with the ﬁ fth set being to 15 per the NFHS Rules Book. b) Regular season Individual contests, by advance mutual agreement of the competing schools, may be played in best 2 of 3 sets with the third set to 25 and no cap. Should both schools not agree on match length, the default shall be the NFHS rule of 3 of 5 sets. c) Member schools may agree in advance during regular season tournaments, on alternate scoring formats but may not increase scoring in play. d) In all cases, whatever format is used, each match shall count as one against the overall limit of matches contained in Bylaw 23. e) For all rounds of postseason play, standard format will be the best 3 of 5 sets (winning score to 25 with the 5th game being to 15). 2) Junior Varsity Play a) Best 2 of 3 sets to 21. b) Member schools may agree in advance during regular season tournaments, on alternate scoring formats (but not longer than 2 of 3 sets to 21). c) In all cases, whatever format is used, each match shall count as one against the overall limit of matches contained in Bylaw 23. 3) Freshmen Play a) Best 2 of 3 sets to 21. b) Member schools may agree in advance during regular season tournaments, on alternate scoring formats (but not longer than 2 of 3 sets to 21). c) In all cases, whatever format is used, each match shall count as one against the overall limit of matches contained in Bylaw 23. D) Warm-up Time, Regular/Postseason Standard 15 minutes of warm-up time between matches: using the 4-5-5-1 format (4 minutes of shared court; 5 minutes of each team with serving team taking court ﬁ rst, and 1 minute back at the bench area prior to taking the court). E) Heat Index All play shall adhere to the KHSAA Heat Index Program. For postseason play, it is the responsibility of the host site manager to ensure and track the heat index and report it accordingly to the KHSAA. F) Deadline to Start Contest No contest shall be started in a postseason contest after 11:00 p.m. local time at any contest site.

CCompetition Rules

53 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a Governing Wrestling tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) (Adopted by the Board of Control) for failure to comply with these provisions. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c direct the drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) the state tournament. I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS B) Pairings/Seeding Meeting Procedures A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play 1) The region manager will coordinate a meeting of participating 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor coaches for the purpose of making region pairings in each postseason competition in wrestling, provided that there is weight class by seeding the participants. suffi cient interest of the membership and such is approved by 2) The Advisory Committee member from the specifi c region shall the Board of Control. chair the meeting and be responsible for compliance with these 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic Competition rules. sections with the approval of the Board of Control. 3) Each school shall have a representative at the seeding meeting 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective for the region tournament or that school may not enter wrestlers. with the 2016-2017 school year and every four years thereafter. 4) The specifi ed reports from the NWCA system that show both 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled the minimum weight and match by match weights shall be on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. brought to the seeding meeting for the region tournament by 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the coach or designated school representative of each school website and is updated as information changes as provided by desiring to participate. the membership with regard to participation. 5) A wrestler may not be entered in a region tournament unless the weigh-in verifi cation records are completed via the NWCA II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION system. A) Dates for Play 6) Those present at the meeting may conduct the business of the 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control region meeting including completion of the seeded brackets. If shall determine the dates of the region and state meets. votes are taken, each school may only have one vote. 2) All meets shall be held within the dates indicated on the 7) Collectively, the schools shall decide the seeded wrestlers in Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the each weight class. For regions without an adopted seeding plan, Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating the following criteria may serve as a guide: school representatives. a) Head to head competition between contestants. 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will b) The record against common opponents; be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. c) A contestant with a better overall record; B) Sites for Play d) A contestant with an exceptional record against acknowledged 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region strong competition; meet sites. e) A returning champion or runner-up in the same weight class; 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after 8) The member school representatives DO NOT HAVE authority to consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The waive the competition rules or create new ones for the basic prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to entry, bracket and scoring procedures seating and parking facilities and such other information as may 9) Following the initial seeding, the tournament manager and be requested by the Commissioner. the region Advisory Committee member shall develop the 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection preliminary bracket. plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining 10) Once the region seeding meeting is complete, no alterations the sites. can be made to the seeding except per Section (C) below. 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to C) Region Tournament Entry Revisions Following Seeding January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already 1) After the seeding is completed, a coach may choose to designate having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed a wrestler into another class by notifying the manager prior to to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be

CCompetition Rules the beginning of weigh-ins.

o allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan.

m 2) Once weigh-ins begin, an athlete may not be entered into a 5) If a region is unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the p lower class than previously entered by the coach as the scales e Commissioner shall establish a plan.

t i will have closed on that previous class.

i 6) The region host school shall own a current license to the o 3) An athlete missing weight at the region weigh-ins may be n Association designated software application for managing

R replaced in that weight class by any eligible member of the u region entries and results or shall contract with a current license l team who is on the NWCA online Alpha Master report, who

s holder. meets the qualifi cations per the minimum weight guidelines, 7) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals who has participated in four high school matches or bouts, who after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall is eligible by these rules, and who is eligible by all other weight be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and qualifi cation rules including a valid weigh-in at the region. community/area support. 4) The wrestler missing weight may be moved to either of the III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, PAIRINGS, SEEDINGS weight classes for which his/her scale weight permits. A) Selection of Tournament Manager 5) The wrestler missing weight, if not replaced by another wrestler 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the from the same squad, creates a bye in the bracket, and if region tournaments, and shall serve as the manager for the necessary, brackets may need to be re-drawn to accurately state tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many refl ect seeding. assistant managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. 6) Once the scales are closed, entries are considered fi nal. At 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools that point, any further withdrawal from the tournament series participating in the tournament as to the time and place of constitutes a forfeit. the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material 7) If any entered wrestler (seeded or otherwise), due to action of and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all the coach prior to or after weigh-ins, changes weight classes, arrangements to conduct the tournament. then the region committee member and tournament manager 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform shall convene all coaches for a supplemental meeting after the the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / scales have closed for 285 pound class. entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according 8) At that short supplemental meeting the participating coaches to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the 54 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK shall vote to determine if the wrestler who was seeded in a 5) The Commissioner shall draw each weight class individually for former class should now be seeded in his/her entered class or if the pairings at the state tournament. any other wrestler changing classes since the fi rst entries were E) Substitutions submitted necessitates an additional seeding discussion. The KHSAA shall develop substitution procedures in an effort to 9) No other wrestling seeding decision from the original seeding ensure full brackets in each weight class in the event that one meeting is able to be discussed or reconsidered as those are of the top four wrestlers from a region become injured or ill and fi nal upon conclusion of the seeding meeting. cannot compete at the State Tournament. D) Region Bracketing V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 1) After this supplemental meeting is completed (if necessary), A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition shall the region committee member and manager shall ensure that be assigned by the Commission in compliance with the Federal the proper bracket is completed for each class according to the Court Decree of 1971 (1987, 2007) and within the published bracketing guidelines. guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. 2) All region wrestling brackets shall be placed in the proper 4-, B) Offi cials will be assigned shall comply with the published 8- or 16-person bracket. A 12-person brackets may not be used guidelines of the KHSAA Offi cials Guidebook. as the NFHS wrestling rules require a bracket of a power of 4. C) The minimum standards for all offi cials to offi ciate postseason 3) Each weight class shall be considered separately as to bracket contests shall be: size. A weight class with 1-4 wrestlers shall use a 4-person 1) Attend approved advanced training efforts (camps, clinics, bracket; 5-8 wrestlers shall use an 8-person bracket and 9-16 meetings) to include rules and coverage of mechanics once shall use a 16-person bracket. every four years to be eligible for the four years following the IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS training clinic provided such are offered or approved by the A) Roster Requirement KHSAA. Such interval may be revised by the KHSAA staff liaison 1) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on in a particular sport due to availability. This requirement shall be the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its for state and regional play in the sports in which such training online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. is offered or approved, and may be extended to the district level 2) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and by the Commission based on the supply of qualifi ed offi cials.; shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. 2) Take Part 2 exam with passing grade of at least 80 during 3) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked current year if it is offered. Exceptions may be approved by the so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised Commission; following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for 3) Receive credit for annual KHSAA Rules Clinic or approved tournament play. makeup clinic; 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a 4) Attend a minimum of four (4) local association meetings in a documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. sport which has local associations. KHSAA Rules Clinics and B) Individual Entry Requirements Part 2 Examination meetings shall not count as one of these 1) To be eligible to compete in the region or state meet, a four meetings. Local associations may adopt policies addressing contestant shall have a combination of four matches or four excused absences, but may not count non-offi ciating absences weigh-ins representing the high school during the current as properly attending; season in order to be eligible to enter the region. 5) Be in good standing with local association rules as it relates 2) An individual desiring to be entered in postseason competition to fi nancial and reporting obligations. The KHSAA may waive shall be eligible according to the KHSAA Weight Management this requirement if it is in the best interest of the assignment of requirements. offi cials within a particular sport; and 3) Each coach shall ensure that each athlete has a completed 6) For sports and tournament levels requiring a Level 2 or Level 3 wrestling permission form on fi le with the school (the Alpha offi cial, those sports offi cials shall have licensed no later than Report along with the sub-7% form if necessary). This form is to the published late deadline for licensing year. contain signatures from the athlete, the coach and the parents D) Postseason wrestling offi cials shall meet the following criteria: verifying compliance with all rules as well as the health care 1) Only offi cials licensed by the Kentucky High School Athletic provider who did the minimum weight testing, and the doctor if Association may offi ciate in the regional or state tournament. the athlete is below 7%. Only KHSAA Level 2 or Level 3 offi cials shall be used in the C) Team Entry and Advancement regional or State Tournaments. Exceptions may be approved by

CCompetition Rules 1) Each coach may enter one participant in each weight class in the Commission;

o m the region tournament. 2) Only members of the Kentucky Wrestling Ofﬁ cials Association p 2) All entries must come from the online roster management will be assigned to the state tournament;

t i system and be currect with all records on the NWCA online 3) Local associations may submit recommendations for postseason

i o weight management system. assignments to region and state tournament contests. The ﬁ nal

R D) Advancement to State Meet selection shall be made by the Commission;

e 1) The top four wrestlers in each weight class shall advance from 4) The Assigning Secretary is to have a rankings/ratings system s the region tournament into the state tournament. In the event approved by the Regional Policy Board that includes at least that a seeded wrestler is not able to participate in the state two opportunities for coaches to evaluate performance. The tournament due to injury or other reason beyond the control of recommended intervals are preseason, and mid-to-late season the wrestler, the appropriate seeded wrestler(s) will be moved evaluations; up in the seeding, and the fi fth place wrestler from the region 5) The Board of Control has established fees for postseason play; tournament will be seeded fourth. 6) Additional postseason allowances for lodging, etc. shall be at 2) There shall be a rotation system developed that attempts the discretion of the tournament manager and shall be approved to ensure that there are no byes in the state tournament by by the Commissioner. rolling into the tournament, the fi fth place wrestler from a VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS randomly selected region if the qualifying region has less than A) REGION TOURNAMENT CHAMPION fi ve wrestlers or the fi fth place wrestler is unavailable and a 1) The team that scores the greatest number of points during the replacement is needed. tournament shall be declared the team champion. 3) Notifi cation of situations of this type where substitutions are 2) Team points will be awarded or deducted in accordance with made shall be made to the Commissioner immediately with the National Federation Rules Book. further notifi cation to all effected coaches. 3) There will be a full wrestle-back tournament in each weight 4) Wrestlers unable to compete may be replaced prior to weigh- class at the region tournament. ins, and such shall not constitute a forfeit. Other positions shall 4) The region tournament will be wrestled and scored to six places be rotated up in the bracketing. Wrestlers missing weight at the in each bracket. State tournament shall constitute a forfeit.

55 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK B) STATE TOURNAMENT CHAMPION (NWCA) online system between October 15 and the fi rst 1) The team that scores the greatest number of points during the regular season match. tournament shall be declared the team champion. f) The Head Coach of the team is responsible for maintaining a 2) Team points will be awarded or deducted in accordance with signed copy of the Alpha Report as the wrestling permission the National Federation Rules Book. form. 3) There will be a full wrestle-back tournament in each weight g) Each athlete subject to the sub-7% (sub 12% for femals) class at the state tournament. physician permission shall have a properly completed form 4) The state tournament will be wrestled and scored to eight processed, and the Head Coach shall send a copy of that form places in each bracket. to the KHSAA prior to the fi rst competition. Once properly C) Trophies and Awards received, the KHSAA will authorize the wrestler to compete 1) Region. using the online system and until such is done, the wrestler a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up at may not compete. each region. h) A wrestler may not compete on the day of the minimum body b) Awards will be given to fi rst four (4) placers in each weight weight testing. class at each region tournament. i) A wrestler desiring to appeal the original minimum weight c) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the certifi cation results shall complete the hydrostatic weight gate receipts of that tournament. appeal within two (2) weeks of the original test. 2) State. j) A wrestler may never be certifi ed into a class which is below a) Trophies will be awarded to the teams fi nishing fi rst, second, the minimum body weight determined by the wrestler, his/her third and fourth at the state meet. parents, his/her coach and his/her doctor and verifi ed by using b) Awards will be given to the fi rst eight (8) fi nishers in each the proper calculation forms. weight class at the state tournament. 2) Weight Classes, Weigh-ins and Records c) Awards will be presented to the competitor with the Quickest a) Competition shall be divided into weight classes for regular Pin, and to the Most Valuable Wrestler. and postseason competition as defi ned in the NFHS Wrestling d) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals Rules. at the state tournament. b) The two-pound growth allowance will be added to each class VII) FINANCES, PASSES boundary on December 25, thereby shifting the bounds of the A) Region/Section class. The individual wrestler does not “receive” two pounds, 1) The fi nances of the region tournament will be managed at the the class weight limit is simply increased by two pounds. region level. c) For each round of the KHSAA postseason tournament, the 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of two pound weight / growth allowance provisions from the net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to National Federation Rules shall be used as such shall be any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment added on December 25. made by teams to help offset event costs. d) A certifi ed scale shall be used to verify weight at all matches B) State (regular and postseason). Scales which do not display 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. current certifi cation or for which current documentation is 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors not available shall not count toward the wrestler’s weigh-in participating in the state tournament. requirements but shall count as though the wrestler weighed VIII) SPORT SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES 288. A) Playing Rules e) If an athlete competes in a match where no certifi ed scale 1) All games shall be played using the NFHS Wrestling Rules was available, the weigh-in counts as a “miss” in all fourteen as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, weight classes with respect to achieving a desired weight governed by State Association adoption provisions in the class weigh-in. National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the f) A member school representative may not compete in any Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky match where a weigh-in is not conducted and recorded. and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. g) The Head Coach of each team shall be responsible for 2) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and entering the complete competition schedule of the team prior participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. to the fi rst competition date, using the NWCA online system

CCompetition Rules B) Speciﬁ cations for Wrestling Tournaments and shall maintain the accuracy of that schedule throughout

o m The speciﬁ cations for recommended and required standards the season. p h) The Head Coach of each team shall provide, for each e for wrestling facilities to be used in tournament play may be

t i competition weigh-in, a match weigh-in form produced by the t developed by Association staff and Advisory Committees and

i o approved by the Board of Control. NWCA online system showing the lowest applicable weight

R C) Length of Periods for each competing wrestler on the actual date of competition.

u l i) Local event managers should have in place an option to e 1) For postseason play, all matches in championship (winner’s) s bracket shall be wrested in 2 minute periods for all three periods. produce such listing in the event that the competing coach 2) For consolation bracket matches, including medal rounds, the does not produce this report at weigh-ins. fi rst round shall only be 1 minute in length. j) Repeated failure to produce these required weigh-in reports D) Weight Management, Certifi cation shall be cause for suspension of the Head Coach from regular 1) Minimum Weight Determination, Weight Control and Reporting or postseason competition or other penalty contained in a) All athletes shall meet eligibility requirements including the KHSAA Bylaw 27 and may subject the team to ineligibility to development of a set minimum body weight. enter the region wrestling tournament. b) An individual desiring to be entered in postseason competition k) Following each match, and prior to the next competition for shall be eligible according to the KHSAA Weight Management the squad, each coach shall enter the actual scale weights of requirements detailed in the Board of Control policies. each wrestler who weighed in for the competition, using the c) Only competitors whose minimum weight has been NWCA online system. For multiple day competition within the determined using the NWCA online weight management same event, only the fi rst day weigh-in is to be recorded. system (including all recording and tracking) are eligible to l) Repeated failure to enter scale weights prior to the next compete. competition shall be cause for suspension of the Head Coach d) Athletes without a minimum weight determination may not from regular or postseason competition or other penalty wrestle in competition or in practice after the fi rst date for contained in KHSAA Bylaw 27 and may subject the team to competition during the regular season. ineligibility to enter the region wrestling tournament. e) The minimum weight class for each wrestler shall be 3) Certifi cation into a Weight Class determined using the National Wrestling Coaches Association a) A wrestler is certifi ed into a particular weight class at any

56 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK regularly scheduled match or tournament any time on or prior to the Saturday of NFHS week 30 by making base weight (including growth allowance after December 25) at an offi cial weigh-in on a certifi ed scale as long as that certifi ed weight is not below the documented minimum weight and is at a time allowed by the minimum weight calculations. A wrestler weighing in on or prior to the Saturday of NFHS week 30 is continually certifying at the weigh-in weight. b) Once a wrestler is certifi ed into a particular weight class as of the Saturday of NFHS week 30, he/she may weigh-in only in that class and one class above. He/she is automatically re- certifi ed into a higher weight class after the Saturday of NFHS week 30 by weighing in and qualifying for that class, but never into a lower weight class. After the Saturday of NFHS week 30, making base weight (including growth) two classes above any previously certifi ed weight class automatically renders that wrestler ineligible for the remainder of the year to wrestle in the lower weight class (previous certifi ed weight). c) Please note that this rule is for weigh-ins, not matches. It is possible that a wrestler weighed in at a certain class weight for a match, but wrestled up during that match. That weigh-in would count for the lower, weigh-in class. 4) Weight Control All coaches are cautioned that rapid reduction in weight can endanger the health of the student athlete and coaches are encouraged to keep current with all research in this area. The manager of each meet is to have each participant weighed and it is highly recommended that a physician examine each participant.

CCompetition Rules

57 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES competition. Governing Archery 5) Each competition manager shall appoint (in addition to (Adopted by the Board of Control) him/herself) a competition committee of at least three (3) (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to participating coaches or school administrators. The decision(s) the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be of the competition committee shall be fi nal in matters pertaining appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the to the KHSAA Archery Competition Rules. implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c 6) Neither the KHSAA Offi ce nor the Board will review competition rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) committee decisions, whether alleged errors are due to faulty I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS judgment or misinterpretation of the rules. A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Competition IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER COMPETITION PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor A) Roster Requirement postseason competition in archery, provided that there is 1) Enrollment Requirement for this Sport-Activity suffi cient interest of the membership and such is approved by a) To be a contestant on a member school team, a student must, the Board of Control. on Friday of each grading period, be enrolled as a full-time 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic student in at least four hours of instruction as provided in sections with the approval of the Board of Control. Kentucky Board of Education regulation 702 KAR 7:125 (of 3) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled the six hours of instruction required) or the equivalent of four on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. hours of instruction acceptable to graduation at the member 4) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA school he or she desires to represent in order to be eligible website and is updated as information changes as provided by for athletics. the membership with regard to participation. b) A student repeating a grade for any reason is ineligible to II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION participate in interscholastic athletics at the high school level A) Dates for Competition (grades 9 through 12) during the second year in that grade. 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control c) A pupil in grades 7 & 8 may play on the high school team shall determine the dates of the region and state competitions. provided that the elementary school, middle school or junior 2) All competitions shall be held within the dates indicated on high school where the student is enrolled is under the direct the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the administrative supervision of the same board of education Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating as the member school the student desires to represent. If school representatives. the local Board of Education has an adopted and enforced 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will defi ned feeder pattern for the middle/junior high school be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. students under the Board, participation at the high school B) Sites for Competition level is restricted to the schools within that pattern (feeder 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region school). competition sites. 2) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The online participation tracking system by the published deadlines. prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to 3) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and seating and parking facilities and such other information as may shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. be requested by the Commissioner. 4) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection so that no additional contestants may be added, deleted or plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining revised following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility the sites. list for competition play. 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to 5) After this time, the only revisions allowed to the overall roster January 1 of the year in which the meet is held, and already will be to correct a documented clerical error as approved by having a suitable facility for hosting the meet shall be allowed the Commissioner. to apply, and only those competing in the current year will be B) Team Photo Requirement allowed to vote for the region meet site selection plan. Each school shall submit a properly identifi ed team photograph 5) The region host shall acquire all permits needed to conduct such in compliance with published deadlines and directives.

CCompetition Rules C) School Entry into Regional Competition

o competition. m 6) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state ﬁ nals 1) A team consists of 12-24 students. p 2) After this entry, the only revision allowed will be to correct a e after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall

t i documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner.

i be guided by competition equipment, necessary hotel facilities, o D) Withdrawal after Entry Deadline n playing facilities, and community/area support.

R 1) No school which enters a region or state competition (draws for u III) COMPETITION MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS

e place) shall withdraw from the competition.

s A) Selection of Competition Manager 2) If a school withdraws from a region or state competition at any 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the time following the deadline for entry at the region competition, region meets, and shall serve as the manager for the state meet. that school shall be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant managers as E) Minimum Number of Contests deemed necessary to manage the event. There is no minimum number of contests needed to be eligible 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools to compete in the region or state competition. participating in the competition as to the time and place of F) Advancement to State Competition the competition, to supply him or her with entry material 1) The winning and runner-up team at each regional competition and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all shall advance to the state competition. arrangements to conduct the competition. 2) In addition, any individual (boy or girl) fi nishing in the top three 3) It is an explicit duty of each competition manager to inform (3) at each regional competition that is not advancing with a the association IMMEDIATELY as to the entries / results when team shall advance to the state competition as an individual. requested by KHSAA staff and according to the time deadlines 3) A team will comprise of a minimum of 12 total shooters for that provided including the actual site of the competition. The school. A school may shoot up to 24 at the region. receipts of a competition may be assessed a fi ne (levied against G) Substitutions the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. 1) Substitutions may not be made at the regional competition 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state following the initial entry. competition and may appoint as many assistant managers as 2) Following the regional, substitutes for the members of a deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner qualifying team may be made from the list of individuals on the will direct all of the business necessary to conduct the state 58 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK online roster. posted on the KHSAA website as updated. 3) There are no substitutes for individual qualifi ers. 2) Additional rules otherwise developed by the KHSAA may be V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS / RULES implemented in competitions played in Kentucky and will be A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition distributed to the membership when relevant. (region and state) shall be selected by the Association staff in 3) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and consultation with NASP®/KYNASP® representatives. participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. B) The NASP®/KYNASP® rules offi cials shall, in conjunction with B) Competition Tie Breakers the competition manager, establish the conditions of play at the 1) Individual Competition region and state competitions. a) Individual competition tiebreaker shall begin by comparing C) Tournament Format total score, then # of 10’s, 9’s, 8’s, etc. 1) Region b) If a tie persists, the tie shall remain. a) Each Team with a minimum 12 Shooters (24 Maximum) will 2) Team Competition shoot one fl ight (Three 10 Meter Scoring Ends and Three 15 a) begin by comparing total score, then # of 10’s, 9’s, 8’s, etc. Meter Scoring Ends). The top 12 scores will be combined to b) If a tie persists, begin by each team selecting fi ve archers determine the team score. from their teams. b) The winning and runner-up team at each regional competition i) These fi ve archers from each team will shoot a 5-arrow shall advance to the state competition. warm-up end at 15 meters and then a 5-arrow scoring end c) In addition, any individual (boys or girls) fi nishing in the top at 15 meters. three (3) at each regional competition that is not advancing ii) The combined scores of team members will be compared with a team shall advance to the state competition as an to break the tie. individual. iii) If a tie persists both teams will choose one shooter who 2) State will shoot a single arrow shot from 15 meters, closest to the a) Each team will shoot one fl ight (Three 10 Meter Scoring Ends middle of the target’s center will break the tie. and Three 15 Meter Scoring Ends). The top 12 scores will be C) Equipment combined to determine the team’s score. 1) Only equipment specifi ed for use in the NASP® program may b) The four teams with the highest fi rst fl ight scores will advance be used in competition. to the medal round. 2) Only the stock (original) unmodifi ed Genesis™ bow approved c) The Medal Round will involve these four teams who will for NASP® may be used. complete a fl ight to determine placement for awards. 3) Only the stock (original) unmodifi ed Easton 1820 arrows Champion, Runner-up, Third place and fourth place teams. approved for NASP® may be used. d) Individual medals will be given to the top eight (8) individual D) Uniforms fi nishers (boys or girls) at the state tournament. 1) School uniforms must be worn during competition. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS 2) School uniforms can have the school name and/or logo and the A) Champion student’s name on them. 1) The champion of each region competition will be the team with 3) Sponsorships may be secured, but may not be from companies the highest score (sum top 12 archers). that manufacture alcohol or tobacco products. 2) The champion of the state competition will be the team with 4) Any sponsorship the school has secured may be displayed on the highest score. the uniforms of the competitors. B) Trophies and Awards E) Unsportsmanlike Conduct 1) Region 1) Managers and offi cials have the strictest instructions to a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up at disqualify any contestant/coach/captain/pilot and/or other each region. person guilty or profane or indecent language or of gross b) Individual medals will be given to top four (4) individuals unsportsmanlike conduct. (boys or girls) at each region competition. 2) If contestants or people from any school entered in a state 2) State series are found guilty of carelessness or maliciously breaking, a) Trophies and individual medals will be awarded to the teams damaging or destroying property or equipment belonging to fi nishing fi rst, second, third and fourth place teams at the the host site, such school shall be held responsible for costs state tournament. incurred.

CCompetition Rules b) Individual medals will be given to the top eight (8) individual F) Insurance Coverage

o m ﬁ nishers (boys or girls) at the state tournament. 1) The schools and students will be responsible for any equipment p related insurance and other necessary insurance as in any other e c) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals

t i sport or sport activity the KHSAA conducts. t at the state tournament.

i o 2) All member schools are reminded to take precautionary steps to n VII) FINANCES AND PASSES

R A) Region ensure that all equipment and product safety risk measures are

u l taken including insurance coverage. e 1) The fi nances of the region competition will be managed at the s region level. 3) The KHSAA shall have catastrophic medical coverage for both 2) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the the regional and state competitions. gate receipts of that tournament. G) Other 3) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of 1) Tobacco Products: No coach, contestant or any other person net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to connected with a team shall be permitted to use tobacco any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment products in the competition area, either during practice or while made by teams to help offset event costs. a contest is in progress. B) State 2) Alcohol: The possession, distribution, sale and/or consumption 1) The Association will fi nance the state competition. of alcoholic beverages are prohibited at the site and on any 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors affi liated property of any KHSAA state series contest. State series participating in the state competition. hosts are required to make all state series contest sites and any C) Passes affi liated property, including parking lots, fan accommodation 1) Each school will receive passes for all qualifi ers. areas, and other school or event venue property, alcohol free 2) Only people with passes will be allowed in the range and lane zones on the date or dates of any KHSAA event being held at area. the site. Violation of this policy by an event host will subject the VIII) SPECIAL COMPETITION AND REGULAR SEASON RULES host to a penalty for violation. Such penalty may include but not A) Competition Rules necessarily be limited to prohibition against subsequent event 1) KHSAA championship competition shall be conducted in hosting assignments. accordance with NASP® competition rules. These rules shall be

59 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK CCompetition Rules

60 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES will direct all of the business necessary to conduct the state Governing Bass Fishing competition. (Adopted by the Board of Control) 5. Each competition manager shall appoint (in addition to (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to him/herself) a competition committee of at least three (3) the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be participating coaches or school administrators. The decision(s) appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the of the competition committee shall be fi nal in matters pertaining implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c to the KHSAA Bass Fishing Competition Rules. rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) 6. Neither the KHSAA Offi ce nor the Board will review competition I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS committee decisions, whether alleged errors are due to faulty A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Competition judgment or misinterpretation of the rules. 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER COMPETITION PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS postseason competition in bass fi shing, provided that there is A) Roster Requirement suffi cient interest of the membership and such is approved by 1) Each contestant shall have a valid Kentucky Fishing license. the Board of Control. 2) Enrollment Requirement for this Sport Activity 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic a) To be a contestant on a member school team, a student must, sections with the approval of the Board of Control. on Friday of each grading period, be enrolled as a full-time 3) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled student in at least four hours of instruction as provided in on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. Kentucky Board of Education regulation 702 KAR 7:125 (of 4) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA the six hours of instruction required) or the equivalent of four website and is updated as information changes as provided by hours of instruction acceptable to graduation at the member the membership with regard to participation. school he or she desires to represent in order to be eligible II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION for athletics. A) Dates for Competition b) A student repeating a grade for any reason is ineligible to 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control participate in interscholastic athletics at the high school level shall determine the dates of the region and state competitions. (grades 9 through 12) during the second year in that grade. 2) All competitions shall be held within the dates indicated on c) A pupil in grades 7-8 may play on the high school team the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the provided that the elementary school, middle school or junior Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating high school where the student is enrolled is under the direct school representatives. administrative supervision of the same board of education 3) Schedule confl icts with other academic required activities will as the member school the student desires to represent. If be resolved by the offi ce of the Commissioner. the local Board of Education has an adopted and enforced B) Sites for Competition defi ned feeder pattern for the middle/junior high school 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region students under the Board, participation at the high school competition sites. level is restricted to the schools within that pattern (feeder 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after school). consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The 3) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of contestants on prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA website and its boat launch and parking facilities and such other information as online participation tracking system by the published deadlines., may be requested by the Commissioner. 4) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining 5) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked the sites. so that no additional contestants may be added, deleted or 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to revised following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility January 1 of the year in which the competition is held, and list for competition play. already having a suitable facility for hosting the competition 6) After this time, the only revisions allowed to the overall roster shall be allowed to apply. will be to correct a documented clerical error as approved by 5) All competition lakes/bodies of water shall be properly marked the Commissioner. for and evacuation plan in case of bad weather. B) Team Photo Requirement

CCompetition Rules Each school shall submit a properly identiﬁ ed team photograph

o 6) The region host working with representatives of the m Association’s designated management partner(s) shall acquire in compliance with published deadlines and directives. For bass p ﬁ shing you submit one for each of the boats that qualify for the e all permits needed to conduct such competition.

t i state ﬁ nals.

i 7) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state ﬁ nals o C) Individual Requirement for SAF (Student Angler Foundation) n after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall

R Membership u be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and

e 1) Each participant must be enrolled in the Student Angler

s community/area support. Federation (SAF). III) COMPETITION MANAGERS, MEETINGS AND PAIRINGS 2) Student Angler Federation enrollment provides: A) Selection of Competition Manager a) Insurance coverage for the student angler and adult volunteer 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the region while competing in KHSAA and SAF competitions; competitions. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant b) Insurance coverage for all school team fi shing events managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. (including the option to add the school as additionally 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools insured); participating in the competition as to the time and place of c) Optional additional insured coverage for the member school the competition, to supply him or her with entry material for which the student is representing; and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all d) An innovative high-value fundraising program that allows arrangements to conduct the competition. teams to sell custom Solar Bat polarized sunglasses; 3) It is an explicit duty of each competition manager to inform e) Educational material for every team, including free access the association IMMEDIATELY as to the entries / results when to the Faculty of Fishing Advantage Angler Training Package requested by KHSAA staff and according to the time deadlines (students create an account at the TBF Members-only Store provided including the actual site of the competition. The using their SAF membership number to access the program); receipts of a competition can be assessed a fi ne (levied against f) A digital subscription to FLW Bass Fishing magazine; the manager) for failure to comply with these provisions. g) Discounts on FLW clothing; and 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state H) Students 16 or older, are also eligible to win prizes in the competition and may appoint as many assistant managers as monthly FLW Giveaway. deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner 61 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK D) School Entry into Regional Competition B) State 1) Each school shall enter up to six boats in regional competition. 1) The Association will fi nance the state competition. 2) Each boat may have up to four contestants assigned from the 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors online roster to be designated as a member of that boat entry, participating in the state competition. only two of which may be in the boat at any one time. C) Passes 3) No student may be on more than one boat roster. 1) Each school will receive passes for all qualifi ers, a pass for the 4) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a coach, and a captain’s pass to drive the boat. documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. 2) Only people with passes will be allowed on boats. 5) Schools must enter in the assigned competition designated to VIII) SPECIAL COMPETITION AND REGULAR SEASON RULES the county in which your school is in unless prior approval has A) Coaches / Captains / Pilots been granted by the KHSAA for competitions on Sunday which 1) Coaches: Each school shall designate at least one (1) individual would confl ict with school policy. to be the coach of the Bass Fishing program. 6) All boats from a school must be entered in the same Regional. a) The designated coach(es) must meet all Bylaw 25 E) Withdrawal after Entry Deadline requirements. 1) No school which enters a region or state competition (draws for b) The coach may serve as the captain of one of the boats and is place) shall withdraw from the competition. held to the same restrictions as the captain. 2) If a school withdraws from a region or state competition at 2) Captains: Each boat entered in the region or state competition any time following the deadline for boat entry at the region must have an adult captain on the boat at all times. competition, that school shall be penalized in accordance with a) The captain shall be restricted in their activity, and have Bylaw 27. general supervision over the students in that specifi c boat. F) Minimum Number of Contests b) The captain of the boat is allowed to talk to the participants There is no minimum number of contest needed to be eligible to and may make suggestions but may not fi sh in any respect, compete in the region or state competition. including tying lures and handling fi sh or gear. Please note G) Advancement to State Competition exception in Subsection E for captain’s ability to help net fi sh 1) In regions with fi ve (5) or fewer boats entering the regional if only one student is in the boat. competition, all competing teams will advance to the State c) The captain/coach or team participants can operate the Competition. electric (trolling) motor. 2) In regions with more than fi ve (5) boats entering the regional d) It is member school discretion as to whether or not the competition, the greater of fi ve (5) boats or fi fty (50) percent captain has to meet all Bylaw 25 requirements, however, the of the number of boats entering the regional competition, not captain must be 21 years of age; not be a violent offender greater than sixteen (16) boats from any region, shall advance or convicted of a sex crime as defi ned by KRS 17.165 that is to the State Competition. classifi ed as a felony; and shall submit to a criminal record H) Substitutions check under KRS 160.380. 1) Regional entry names (4 per boat) may be adjusted by the 3) Pilot: Each boat may have a fourth occupant, normally the coach prior to the entry revision deadline. owner, who may choose to pilot the boat. The pilot is held to the 2) Substitutes for the qualifying boats in the state competition are same restrictions as the captain. not be allowed. B) Boat Requirements V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS 1) Any volunteer found acceptable by school administration may A) Offi cials for all KHSAA sponsored championship competition provide a boat. (region and state) shall be selected by the Association staff in 2) Each school shall ensure that for each boat provided, an adult consultation with FLW representatives. captain is provided. B) The FLW rules offi cials shall, in conjunction with the competition 3) The boat owner shall provide proof of liability insurance to manager, establish the conditions of play at the region and state the school administration or verifi cation that the owner’s competitions. homeowners insurance has provisions for boat coverage. VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS 4) A school unable to secure a boat but with competitors desiring A) Champion to compete in the region or state competition should contact 1) The champion of each region competition will be the team with FLW for assistance, which is available from numerous clubs the most weight for bass caught with ties broken as detailed across the state.

CCompetition Rules within the Special Competition and Regular Season Rules. 5) No student will be allowed to operate the outboard motor on

o m 2) The champion of the state competition will be the team that the boat. p 6) Either a student or the captain (or pilot if it is the boat owner) e accumulates the most weight in bass caught in the time

t i may operate the trolling motor. t designated for the entire state ﬁ nals with ties broken as detailed

i o within the Special Competition and Regular Season Rules. 7) The captain (or pilot if it is the boat owner) will be responsible

R B) Trophies and Awards for operating the outboard motor.

l e 1) Region 8) All boats must be propeller-driven and a minimum of 16 feet s a) Trophies and individual medals will be given to the team in length. No barges or similarly cumbersome craft will be winner and runner-up at each region. permitted. b) An additional medal will be given to the participant that 9) Each boat must have all required U.S. Coast Guard safety caught the largest bass of that competition. equipment. 2) State 10) Boats must contain a properly aerated live-well space to a) Trophies and inidivual medals will be awarded to the top four maintain alive a limit catch of bass. (4) teams at the state tournament. C) Safety Provisions b) An additional medal will be given to the participant that 1) All participants must wear a coast guard approved life jacket the caught the largest bass of that competition. entire time they are on the water. If they do not, disqualifi cation c) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals will occur. This includes the captain (and pilot if applicable) of at the state tournament. the boat. VII) FINANCES AND PASSES 2) Protective eye wear is mandated for all participants in the boat, A) Region including the captain (and pilot if applicable) 1) The fi nances of the region competition will be managed at the 3) All boats must go through a safety check prior to the start of region level. the competition 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of 4) The captain (and pilot if applicable) must observe all posted net profi t/loss, which shall be shared.All gross receipts prior to state and local speed restrictions. If no such restrictions are in any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment place, the speed limit shall be 45 miles per hour. made by teams to help offset event costs. 5) In the event of equipment failure or emergency, the competition

62 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK manager must be notifi ed as soon as it is safe to do so. There must be secured in an area and can be added once the alternate are then three permitted methods of returning to the check-in: is picked up. (1) by both contestants remaining in their boat and being towed 15) Team participants of the boat may net the fi sh for that boat. by water, (2) with permission from the competition manager, The captain of the boat may net fi sh for the participants with by one contestant entering the boat of another team or (3) one or two contestants if asked to do so. both contestants entering a rescue boat so designated by the 16) Participants must stay completely in the boat unless they are completion manager. Under these three conditions the team’s using an authorized rest room facility, are back at the dock catch may be counted without penalty (except for late penalties switching participants, or due to some other emergency or or other penalties pertaining to other tournament rules). Teams malfunction. If an emergency or malfunction occurs, the boat that elect to return to the check-in by any other means than must contact the local manager or his/her designee prior to cited above will forfeit their day’s catch to that point in time leaving the boat. of the tournament day. Any team returning to the check-in 17) No live bait or trolling is allowed in the region or state fi nal. point will be eligible to restart and resume competition under F) Weights and Weigh-ins the supervision of the competition manager for his designated 1) The total weight for each of the fi ve (5) fi sh limited to that boat offi cial. will count for the team total of that competition. D) Competition Rules 2) Ties will be broken, if the poundage is equal, in the following 1) All Competitions shall be held using the competition rules as manner: First criteria will be the largest fi sh; second criteria will promulgated by FLW unless modifi ed by the KHSAA. be the number of fi sh. 2) Additional rules otherwise developed by the KHSAA may be 3) Individual weight will also be recorded for the top fi sh implemented in competitions played in Kentucky and will be designated by each boat. distributed to the membership when relevant. 4) The minimum length limit for bass is 12 inches unless the state 3) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and or lake limit is more than 12 inches, in which case, the state participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. or lake limit prevails. Bass presented for weigh-in that fail to 4) The KHSAA and its managers will contract with FLW personnel measure the minimum length will be penalized at the rate of to assist with the Region and State Competitions. one pound for each inch short for each bass presented. E) Competition Provisions and Procedures 5) There will be a fi ve fi sh limit per boat. No more than fi ve (5) fi sh 1) Each boat team shall consist of up to four student participants in the live well at any time. per boat. 6) Fish may be culled if a participant(s) has fi ve (5) fi sh in the live 2) A school may enter up to six boats where only two of the four well. students entered for that boat may fi sh at any one time on that 7) All fi sh that are put in the livewell must be kept alive. Dead fi sh boat. will have a ½ pound deduction and cannot count as the large 3) During competition, any boat may return to the dock and fi sh for that boat. Dead fi sh may not be culled. exchange competitors, each of whom must have been on the 8) Any transfer of fi sh from one live well to a different live well in four-person entry. another boat due to malfunction must be made in the presence 4) All regions will be scheduled for at least 5 hours of fi shing of the local manager or his/her designee. and cannot exceed 8 hours on the water. This might have to be 9) All fi sh will be released immediately after weigh-in. adjusted due to weather. E) Off-limits, Practice and Competition 5) A region competition is considered to be complete if half of the 1) Once competition is under way, contestants may not obtain scheduled competition time has been fi shed. fi shing patterns or locations from non-competitors, follow a 6) If the competition is postponed until the rain date, no fi sh will non-competitor’s boat or participate in the practice of “hole count towards the rain date weigh-ins. sitting”, a practice wherein a non-competitor sits on a fi shing 7) If weather shuts down the Region once it has been rescheduled spot, holding it for a contestant. for rain date, the winner will be determined by the fi sh caught 2) Non-competitors may not place markers for contestants. All during the time allotted for that region on the second day. of these acts are prohibited and may result in the immediate 8) State fi nal will consist of two days of fi shing with a maximum of disqualifi cation of the boat. eight (8) hours of fi shing each day, when possible. 3) There is no practice period or off-limits period. Competitors 9) If weather shuts down either day of the State fi nal once it has may be on competition waters anytime until the start of the started, that day’s weight will be determined by the fi sh caught precompetition meeting.

CCompetition Rules during the time allotted for that day. 4) Contestants, coaches nor captains (including pilots if applicable)

m 10) In the state fi nal, if one of the days is completed and the other may not enter competition waters to locate bass or potential p day is not able to be fi shed because of weather, the winner(s) fi shing waters or sightsee after the start of the precompetition

t i will be determined by the one day weigh-in. meeting except during competition hours.

i o 11) All participants in the ﬁ rst ﬂ ight must be back in for weigh-in 5) Testing equipment on competition waters after the start of the

R by 3:00 p.m. at the region and the state ﬁ nal. This would vary precompetition meeting is permitted only with prior approval

u l only if a weather alert has been issued which might shorten from the competition director.

e s that day’s competition. It is the participant(s) in the fi rst fl ight’s 6) The purchasing of, or bartering for, information about locating responsibility to make sure the boat is back to the dock by 3:00 or catching fi sh on competition waters, including but not p.m. limited to GPS waypoints (other than through commercially 12) All participants in the second fl ight must be back in for weigh- available sources) and the hiring of fi shing guide services is in by 3:15 p.m. at the region and the state fi nal. This would vary not permitted by contestants, coaches or captains within 15 only if a weather alert has been issued which might shorten that days of any competition. The penalty for violation of this rule day’s competition. It is the participant(s) in the second fl ight’s is disqualifi cation responsibility to make sure the boat is back to the dock by 3:15 F) Uniforms p.m. 1) School uniforms must be worn during competition. 13) There will be a one pound deduction for every minute a 2) School uniforms can have the school name and/or logo and the participant is late getting back for weigh-ins up to 15 minutes. student’s name on them. After 15 minutes, no weight will be allowed for that day. It is the 3) Sponsorships may be secured, but may not be from companies participant’s responsibility to notify the competition manager in that manufacture alcohol or tobacco products. advance of the 3:00 p.m. (or 3:15 in second fl ight) closing time 4) Any sponsorship the school has secured may be displayed on of any problems that may have occurred the uniforms or on the captain/pilot of the boat. 14) Participants must only use the gear that is in the boat when 5) Sponsorship logos may be displayed on the boats that are in the boat leaves the dock at the start of the day. They may use the competition. their own gear or the gear of the captain in the boat. If an 6) The uniform of the student anglers shall be distinct from that of alternate is used in the competition, the gear of the alternate the coach or boat captain to limit concerns as to who is fi shing.

63 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK G) Unsportsmanlike Conduct 1) Managers and offi cials have the strictest instructions to disqualify any contestant/coach/captain/pilot and/or other person guilty or profane or indecent language or of gross unsportsmanlike conduct. 2) If contestants or people from any school entered in a state series are found guilty of carelessness or maliciously breaking, damaging or destroying property or equipment belonging to the host site, such school shall be held responsible for costs incurred. H) Insurance Coverage 1) Membership in the Student Angler Federation provides insurance coverage for all team activities throughout the membership term. 2) The schools and students will be responsible for any equipment related insurance and other necessary insurance just as in any other sport or sport activity the KHSAA conducts. 3) All member schools are reminded to take precautionary steps to ensure that all equipment and product safety risk measures are taken including insurance coverage. 4) The KHSAA will also have catastrophic medical coverage for both the regional and state competitions. I) Medical and Other 1) Tobacco Products: No coach, captain, pilot or contestant or any other person connected with a team shall be permitted to use tobacco products in the competition area, either during practice or while a contest is in progress. 2) Use of Inhalers: A student with asthma may possess and use his/her medication during an KHSAA competition (including while in the boat), while under the supervision of school personnel, provided the school meets the outlined procedures of self administration in the School Code. 3) Alcohol: The possession, distribution, sale and/or consumption of alcoholic beverages are prohibited at the site and on any affi liated property of any KHSAA state series contest. State series hosts are required to make all state series contest sites and any affi liated property, including parking lots, fan accommodation areas, and other school or event venue property, alcohol free zones on the date or dates of any KHSAA event being held at the site. Violation of this policy by an event host will subject the host to a penalty for violation. Such penalty may include but not necessarily be limited to prohibition against subsequent event hosting assignments.

CCompetition Rules

64 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA COMPETITION RULES tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a Governing Bowling tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) (Adopted by the Board of Control) for failure to comply with these provisions. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c direct the drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) the state tournament. I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER TOURNAMENT PLAY A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play A) Roster Requirement 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor 1) Enrollment Requirement for this Sport Activity postseason competition in bowling for boys and girls, provided a) To be a contestant on a member school team, a student must, that there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is on Friday of each grading period, be enrolled as a full-time approved by the Board of Control. student in at least four hours of instruction as provided in 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic Kentucky Board of Education regulation 702 KAR 7:125 (of sections with the approval of the Board of Control. the six hours of instruction required) or the equivalent of four 3) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled hours of instruction acceptable to graduation at the member on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. school he or she desires to represent in order to be eligible 4) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA for athletics. website and is updated as information changes as provided by b) A student repeating a grade for any reason is ineligible to the membership with regard to participation. participate in interscholastic athletics at the high school level II) DATES AND SITES FOR POSTSEASON COMPETITION (grades 9 through 12) during the second year in that grade. A) Dates for Play c) A pupil in grades 7 & 8 may play on the high school team 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control provided that the elementary school, middle school or junior shall determine the dates and sites of the region and state high school where the student is enrolled is under the direct tournaments. administrative supervision of the same board of education 2) All tournaments shall be held within the dates indicated on as the member school the student desires to represent. If the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the the local Board of Education has an adopted and enforced Commissioner and recommended by a vote of the participating defi ned feeder pattern for the middle/junior high school school representatives. Schedule confl icts with other academic students under the Board, participation at the high school required activities will be resolved by the offi ce of the level is restricted to the schools within that pattern (feeder Commissioner. school). B) Sites for Play 2) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of enrolled 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region contestants on the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA tournament sites. website and its online participation tracking system by the 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after published deadlines. consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The 3) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. seating and parking facilities and such other information as may 4) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked be requested by the Commissioner. so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining tournament play. the sites. 5) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and B) Per match Roster/Substitutions already having a suitable facility for hosting the tournament 1) A school may enter a team composed of twelve (12) players in shall be allowed to apply. each postseason tournament match from the roster submitted 5) Only those competing in the current year will be allowed to online.

CCompetition Rules 2) Any player whose name is on the ofﬁ cial roster may be

o vote for the region tournament site selection plan. If a region is m unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the Commissioner shall substituted on a team prior to the time of the draw for p the region tournament. After the draw is ﬁ nal, the region e establish a plan.

t i tournament manager may allow substitution if the original

i 6) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state ﬁ nals o entry is prevented from participating due to circumstances due n after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall

R to injury/illness. No advantage may be gained by a substitution u be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and

e or it will not be permitted.

s community/area support. 7) It is recommended the regional tournaments only be held at 3) Players shall participate in region tournament play to be eligible sites that are BPAA member sites. for the state tournaments. 8) The Commissioner shall ensure that the state tournament site 4) A school does not have to have the required number of is a BPAA member. competitors to constitute a team to enter singles into the singles competition. III) TOURNAMENT MANAGERS, PAIRINGS C) Minimum Number of Contests A) Selection of Tournament Manager 1) There is no minimum number of contests for team competition. 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the 2) There is no minimum number of contests for singles competition. region tournaments, and shall serve as the manager for the D) Advancement to State Tournament state tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many 1) The champion and runner-up shall qualify for the team State assistant managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. Tournaments (top 2 fi nishers from each region). 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools 2) The top four individual fi nishers from each region shall advance participating in the tournament as to the time and place of to the State Tournament, the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all V) UMPIRES / OFFICIALS arrangements to conduct the tournament. 1) The Association shall contract with outside individuals as 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform necessary to serve as offi cials at the Region tournament. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / 2) The Association shall contract with outside individuals as entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according necessary to serve as offi cials at the State tournament. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the 65 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS a) A ninth (9) and tenth (10) frame roll off would be used and A) Team Tournament Format Champion continued until a winner is determined. 1) Region D) Trophies and Awards a) Teams will bowl one game with two teams of four bowlers, 1) Region dropping the low score on each lane. That six bowler total will a) Trophies will be given to the team winner and runner-up at be used to seed the team into a bracket. each region. b) The team will then bowl whichever team they are seeded to b) Individual medals will be given to top four (4) individuals at bowl in a match. each region meet. c) A match will consist of baker games. c) The trophies and medals at the region shall be paid from the d) The fi rst team to win three games will be the winner. gate receipts of that tournament. e) The winner will advance to the next round. 2) State f) Rounds will continue until a winner and runner-up are a) Trophies and inidivual medals will be awarded to the teams established. Region winners and runners-up will advance to fi nishing fi rst and second, and two semifi nalists at the state the state tournament. tournament. 2) State b) Awards will be given to the top eight (8) individual fi nishers a) Teams will bowl one game with two teams of four bowlers, at the state tournament. dropping the low score on each lane. That six bowler total will c) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies and medals be used to seed the team into a bracket. at the state tournament. b) The team will then bowl whichever team they are seeded to VII) FINANCES bowl in a match. A) Region c) A match will be consist of baker games. 1) The fi nances of the region tournament will be managed at the d) The fi rst team to win three games will be the winner. region level. e) The winner will advance to the next round. 2) The region competing schools shall decide any distribution of f) Rounds will continue until a champion, runner-up and net profi t/loss, which shall be shared. All gross receipts prior to semifi nalist are established. any distribution shall include any applicable advance payment B) Individual Tournament Format Champion made by teams to help offset event costs. 1) Region B) State a) Individuals shall be entered to the region by designation of 1) The Association will fi nance the state tournament. their coach. 2) Schools are responsible for the expenses of competitors b) Each school may enter their top 4 individual bowlers in each participating in the state tournament. of the boys and girls singles competitions. VIII) SPORT-ACTIVITY SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES c) Bowlers shall bowl 3 games and the top eight will advance A) Playing Rules to the semi-fi nals where they will bowl two additional games. Additional rules developed by the Association may be implemented d) At the conclusion of the two semi-fi nal round games their in contests played in Kentucky and will be distributed to the 5 game total will be used to determine the top four bowlers membership when relevant. who will be seeded into a stepladder fi nal. This will also B) Dress Code establish the fi fth through eight place fi nishers. 1) It is recommended that players wear school uniforms during e) From that point on the top four bowlers will bowl a ladder play. tournament until a champion is determined, and the 2) It is recommended that a uniform number be on the right sleeve stepladder fi nal will establish the fi rst through fourth place of the uniform for identifi cation. fi nishers. 3) Bowlers must also wear full length slacks. These slacks may be f) The top four bowlers will advance to the state tournament. of any color as long as they are similar to that of the rest of the 2) State team and do not have any tears or holes in them. a) Four individuals will advance from the region tournament. 4) Bowlers may NOT wear shorts, or jeans. b) Bowlers shall bowl 3 games and the top eight will advance 5) Bowlers out of uniform will not be allowed to bowl until they to the semi-fi nals where they will bowl two additional games. are able to comply with the rules. c) At the conclusion of the two semi-fi nals round games their 6) Any garment or hat advertising alcohol, drugs, tobacco 5 game total will be used to determine the top four bowlers products or other inappropriate items deemed objectionable by

CCompetition Rules who will be seeded into a stepladder ﬁ nal. This will also the KHSAA State Tournament Director. may not be worn.

o m establish the ﬁ fth through eight place ﬁ nishers. 7) Objectionable permanent body markings (tattoos) shall be p d) From that point on the top four bowlers will bowl a ladder e covered; non-permanent body markings (temporary tattoos or

t i tournament until a champion is determined, and the t body paint) shall be prohibited.

i o stepladder ﬁ nal will establish the ﬁ rst through fourth place 7) Proper shoes are required.

R ﬁ nishers. C) Oil Patterns

u l C) TieBreaking Rules e 1) The offi ce of the Commissioner may select an oil pattern for s 1) Team Qualifying Games each regional. a) Add all dropped qualifying scores back in to total score to 2) The offi ce of the Commissioner shall select an oil pattern for the break the tie. state tournament and shall notify the competing teams upon b) If there is still a tie, the tie shall be broken with the highest arrival. individual score bowled taking the higher seed. 2) Team Baker Games a) When a team ties in a baker game, each team receives half a point. b) If teams are tied after fi fth (5) games, a sixth (6) game shall be played to determine a winner. c) If the (6) sixth baker game ends in a tie, then a (9) ninth and (10) tenth frame roll off will be used to break the tie. 3) Singles Qualifying Games a) For 4th place – a one (1) game roll off between all tied parties. b) If another tie occurs a (9) ninth and (10) tenth frame roll off will be used to break the tie. c) For fi rst (1) through fourth (4) places the tie is broken by the highest single game during qualifying taking the higher seed. 4) Singles Stepladder Games

66 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA RULES AND REGULATIONS tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a Governing Competitive Cheer tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) (Adopted by the Board of Control) for failure to comply with these provisions. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c direct the drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) the state tournament. I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER POSTSEASON COMPETITION A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play A) Roster Requirement 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor 1) Enrollment Requirement for this Sport Activity postseason competition in competitive cheer, provided that a) To be a contestant on a member school team, a student must, there is suffi cient interest of the membership and such is on Friday of each grading period, be enrolled as a full-time approved by the Board of Control. student in at least four hours of instruction as provided in 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic Kentucky Board of Education regulation 702 KAR 7:125 (of sections with the approval of the Board of Control. the six hours of instruction required) or the equivalent of four 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective hours of instruction acceptable to graduation at the member with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. school he or she desires to represent in order to be eligible 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled for athletics. on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. b) A student repeating a grade for any reason is ineligible to 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA participate in interscholastic athletics at the high school level website and is updated as information changes as provided by (grades 9 through 12) during the second year in that grade. the membership with regard to participation. c) A pupil in grades 7 & 8 may play on the high school team 6) Competition sponsored by the KHSAA shall be conducted in provided that the elementary school, middle school or junior consultation with and with execution by, representatives of the high school where the student is enrolled is under the direct Universal Cheer Association (UCA) division of Varsity Brands. administrative supervision of the same board of education II) DATES AND SITES FOR REGION COMPETITIONS as the member school the student desires to represent. If A) Dates for Play the local Board of Education has an adopted and enforced 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control defi ned feeder pattern for the middle/junior high school shall determine the dates and sites of the region and state students under the Board, participation at the high school tournaments. level is restricted to the schools within that pattern (feeder 2) All tournaments shall be held within the dates indicated on school). the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the 2) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of enrolled regional competition schedule as adopted. Schedule confl icts contestants on the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA with other academic required activities will be resolved by the website and its online participation tracking system by the offi ce of the Commissioner. published deadlines. B) Sites for Play 3) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the region shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. tournament sites. 4) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to tournament play. seating and parking facilities and such other information as may 5) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a be requested by the Commissioner. documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection 6) There is no minimum number of competitions to have plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining participated in to be eligible to compete in the postseason. the sites. B) Advancement to State Competition 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to The champion and runner-up of each division at the region

CCompetition Rules competition shall qualify for the same division at the state

o January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and m already having a suitable facility for hosting the tournament competition. p C) Withdrawal from postseason e shall be allowed to apply.

t i 1) All squads shall designate participation status and division on

i 5) Only those competing in the current year will be allowed to o or prior to October 1. n vote for the region tournament site selection plan. If a region is

R 2) No out of state travel will be approved for teams that do not u unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the Commissioner shall

e participate in the KHSAA region competition or for those that

s establish a plan. 6) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals participate in the region competition and then withdraw from after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall the state competition after having qualifi ed. be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and 3) If a school withdraws from the state competition after having community/area support. qualifi ed, that school shall also be penalized in accordance with Bylaw 27. III) COMPETITION MANAGERS D) Substitution A) Selection of Tournament Manager 1) Any member of the roster may be substituted for an originally 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the named individual squad member prior to the region competition. region tournaments, and shall serve as the manager for the 2) No individual participating in the region competition for a state tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many specifi c squad may compete in a different division at the state assistant managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. competition. 2) It is the duty of each region manager to notify all schools 3) The same competitors that participate in the specifi c division at participating in the tournament as to the time and place of the region competition shall participate in that division at the the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material state competition. and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all 4) In the event of an injury, substitution can be made in compliance arrangements to conduct the tournament. with the Injuries During Competition section of these rules. 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / V) OFFICIALS,/JUDGES/TIMERS entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according A) Requirements to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the 1) All judges shall be assigned by UCA in collaboration with the 67 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA. 3) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and 2) Judges must annually license and complete training as participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. conducted by UCA. B) Squad Size/Divisions 3) Judges should be aware of and report to UCA and the KHSAA 1) A school may enter not more than a total of two squads (no any confl icts of interest with regard to assignments. competitor on both teams) in not more than one division each of B) Number of Judges region/state competition in the following competitions: 1) For region, fi ve judges will be used. a) Small – minimum of 6, maximum of 12 All-Girls (a male 2) For the state competition, fi ve (5) judges will be used. participant would result in disqualifi cation) C) Exceptions to any of these requirements must be approved by the b) Medium – minimum of 13, maximum of 16 All-Girls (a male Commissioner. participant would result in disqualifi cation) VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS c) Large – minimum of 17, maximum of 20 All-Girls (a male A) Region participant would result in disqualifi cation) The champion of each region within each division will be squad d) Super-Large – minimum of 21, maximum of 24 All Girls (a with the highest fi nal score after deductions. male participant would result in disqualifi cation) B) State e) Coed Division A – 1 to 3 males and no more than 24 total The champion of each division at the state competition will be members. squad with the highest score after deductions. f) Coed Division B – 4 or more males and no more than 24 total C) Trophies and Awards members. 1) Region 2) Any team advancing from region to state, must compete in the a) Trophies will be given to each region and division competition same division at state as they competed in at region. winner and runner-up. 3) Only one mascot per squad is permitted and is to be counted in b) The trophies at the region shall be paid from the gate receipts the division limits of the team size. of the region event. 4) A mascot in full head and/or body costume must not spot or 2) State stunt except for a forward roll or cartwheel. a) The state competition in each division shall have awarded 5) The mascot is not permitted to participate in pyramids or partner a trophy to the champion, runner-up, third place and fourth students. Should this occur, the team will be disqualifi ed. place teams. C) Scoresheets and Scoring b) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state 1) The KHSAA judge’s score sheet (all-girls/coed), diffi culty grid competition. (all-girls/coed), execution grid and technical sheet are to be VII) FINANCES, PASSES used at both region and state competitions. A) Region 2) For State Competition, fi ve (5) routine judges are to be used. 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan 3) For State and Region, two routine timers, two music timers and that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts three technical judges are to be used. prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance 4) Two of the three tech judges must both report an infraction payment made by teams to help offset event costs. before any deductions/disqualifi cations are assessed. 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: 5) Both timers must record an infraction before a penalty is a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary assessed. trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance D) Music and Routine Rights for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the 1) Member schools should strongly support the rights and tournament should be allowed. privileges of the artists that produce the musical scores and b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of other pieces that are sometimes used in conjunction with the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or region competitions. tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services 2) It is the obligation of each school and team to ensure compliance rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for with applicable state and federal law with regard to copyright paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament and trademark protection. that are approved by the participating teams. 3) It is strongly advised that coaches not allow cheerleaders c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less to perform using recorded or live music before any audience the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be without securing the proper license and permission from the

CCompetition Rules reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for American Society of Composers, Artists and Publishers, 2690

o m game ofﬁ cials and trophies. Cumberland Parkway, Suite 490, Atlanta, GA, 30339, (800) 492- p 7227. e d) The remainder of the proﬁ t shall be divided among the schools

t i 4) Squads are required to adhere to USA Cheer Music Speciﬁ cations t participating in the tournament and the non-participating

i o schools in accordance with previously approved plans. and the approved list of vendors.

R e) The host school should be allowed the proﬁ ts made on 5) It is also advised that the proper mechanical license be

u l obtained if necessary for anyone duplicating music to be used in e programs, concessions, parking, etc. s B) State conjunction with cheer competition by contacting the Harry Fox The Association will fi nance the state competition. After all Agency, 711 Third Avenue, New York, NY, 10017. expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School Athletic D) Mats Association shall retain profi ts from the state competition. 1) Mats are required at all levels of competition. C) Passes 2) In regional competitions, all categories shall be performed on The competing teams in the postseason events will be afforded mats as provided/arranged by the host. passes to accommodate the squad size plus four (4) additional 3) For the state competition, all categories shall be performed on competitors and a maximum of four (4) coaches, all of whom shall mats furnished by the Association. meet the criteria of Bylaw 25. No additional passes will be issued. E) Injuries During Competition VIII) SPORT-ACTIVITY SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES 1) If a team member is seriously injured or becomes extremely ill A) Playing Rules (Competition Rules) during judging, he/she may be excused for the remainder of the 1) The KHSAA sponsors competitive cheer championships for two competition without the team’s being disqualifi ed or penalized and one-half minute routines (2:30). unless as specifi cally detailed in the execution grid scoring. 2) All contests shall be played using the NFHS Spirit Rules 2) However, the team is expected to show competence in adjusting as published by the NFHS in Indianapolis. Additional rules, to the member’s absence. governed by State Association adoption provisions in the 3) A legal substitute from the roster would be allowed to cheer National Federation Playing Rules or otherwise developed by the the remainder of this competition at the discretion of the coach Association may be implemented in contests played in Kentucky provided that person had not cheered in another division at the and will be distributed to the membership when relevant. region competition.

68 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK 4) Injuries during performance shall be handled as follows: a) If a coach chooses to stop a routine/cheer due to an injury/ illness that would endanger the rest of the team or the injured party, he or she must notify the person in charge. b) If a coach enters the performing surface, the routine/cheer shall be stopped. c) After a routine/cheer has been stopped due to an injury/ illness, the decision as to whether or not to repeat the routine/ cheer shall be left to the discretion of the coach. d) The injured person cannot perform in the restarted routine or any remaining categories of the competition. An alternate would be allowed to cheer the remainder of the competition. e) The person in charge of the competition shall have the team repeat the routine/cheer after fi ve (5) teams have performed or after ten (10) minutes, should this unforeseen accident happen at the end of the competition. Judges shall judge the repeat performance from the point at which the injury occurred. Any notes/judging of the fi rst performance up until the point of injury will be included in the judge’s fi nal score. f) If the person in charge feels that more time is needed to regroup, he/she shall have fi nal authority to make this decision. F) Warmup and Sound Check 1) Every attempt should be made to provide warm-up time prior to the beginning of the competition at all levels. 2) Teams shall be allowed to have a sound check prior to the beginning of their routines. G) Competition Provisions 1) All competition provisions used by the KHSAA shall be established in accordance with UCA (Varsity) guidelines. 2) The KHSAA shall establish and publish any procedural restrictions for its region and state competitions. 3) Any tie score unable to be broken by the provisions adopted by UCA shall remain unbroken. 4) Electronic scoring shall be used at all competitions and all results published for the schools in a secure login location. 5) The KHSAA shall annually evaluate and determine which applicable divisions in which it will sponsor competitions and such divisions may or may not be in congruence with current UCA divisions.

CCompetition Rules

69 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK CCompetition Rules

70 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK KHSAA RULES AND REGULATIONS tournament if it is not held at the school. The receipts of a Governing Dance tournament can be assessed a fi ne (levied against the manager) (Adopted by the Board of Control) for failure to comply with these provisions. (Where these rules refer to the Commissioner, they shall refer to 4) The Commissioner shall serve as the manager for the state the Commissioner of the KHSAA. Sports specifi c duties may be tournament and may appoint as many assistant managers as appropriately delegated to a member of the Commission for the deemed necessary to manage the event. The Commissioner will implementation of these rules. See Case Situations for specifi c direct the drawing and all of the business necessary to conduct rulings and interpretations used to administer these provisions) the state tournament. I) ASSIGNMENT OF SCHOOLS IV) ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER POSTSEASON COMPETITION A) Alignment of Teams for Postseason Play A) Roster Requirement 1) The Kentucky High School Athletic Association shall sponsor 1) Enrollment Requirement for this Sport Activity postseason competition in dance, provided that there is a) To be a contestant on a member school team, a student must, suffi cient interest of the membership and such is approved by on Friday of each grading period, be enrolled as a full-time the Board of Control. student in at least four hours of instruction as provided in 2) The Commissioner shall divide the state into geographic Kentucky Board of Education regulation 702 KAR 7:125 (of sections with the approval of the Board of Control. the six hours of instruction required) or the equivalent of four 3) The alignment shall be reviewed for changes to be effective hours of instruction acceptable to graduation at the member with the 2017-2018 school year and every four years thereafter. school he or she desires to represent in order to be eligible 4) In the interim, newly added or deleted programs will be handled for athletics. on a case by case basis by the Commissioner’s offi ce. b) A student repeating a grade for any reason is ineligible to 5) The up to date alignment of schools is maintained on the KHSAA participate in interscholastic athletics at the high school level website and is updated as information changes as provided by (grades 9 through 12) during the second year in that grade. the membership with regard to participation. c) A pupil in grades 7 & 8 may play on the high school team 6) Competition sponsored by the KHSAA shall be conducted in provided that the elementary school, middle school or junior consultation with and with execution by, representatives of the high school where the student is enrolled is under the direct Universal Dance Association (UDA) division of Varsity Brands. administrative supervision of the same board of education II) DATES AND SITES FOR SECTION COMPETITIONS as the member school the student desires to represent. If A) Dates for Play the local Board of Education has an adopted and enforced 1) The Commissioner with the approval of the Board of Control defi ned feeder pattern for the middle/junior high school shall determine the dates and sites of the section and state students under the Board, participation at the high school tournaments. level is restricted to the schools within that pattern (feeder 2) All tournaments shall be held within the dates indicated on school). the Memorandum Calendar unless otherwise approved by the 2) Each school shall enter an unlimited number of enrolled sectional competition schedule as adopted. Schedule confl icts contestants on the postseason electronic roster via the KHSAA with other academic required activities will be resolved by the website and its online participation tracking system by the offi ce of the Commissioner. published deadlines. B) Sites for Play 3) This roster may be revised throughout the regular season and 1) The Commissioner shall make the determination of the section shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. tournament sites. 4) On the fi rst day of postseason play, these rosters shall be locked 2) Schools interested in hosting may submit a request after so that no additional players may be added, deleted or revised consulting with the designated member of the Commission. The following this date, thereby creating the fi nal eligibility list for prospective host may be asked to supply information relating to tournament play. seating and parking facilities and such other information as may 5) After this time, the only revision allowed will be to correct a be requested by the Commissioner. documented clerical error as approved by the Commissioner. 3) The Commissioner’s offi ce may use a requested site selection 6) There is no minimum number of competitions to have plan as a guide, but is not bound by this plan in determining participated in to be eligible to compete in the postseason. the sites. B) Advancement to State Competition 4) Only schools which are members of the Association prior to The champion of each division at the section competition shall

CCompetition Rules qualify for the same division at the state competition. Additional

o January 1 of the year in which the tournament is held, and m already having a suitable facility for hosting the tournament teams shall qualify for the state on a pro-rata basis based on the p number of section competing teams, and the numbers for those e shall be allowed to apply.

t i teams shall be announced by the KHSAA following the sectional

i 5) Only those competing in the current year will be allowed to o declaration deadline. n vote for the section tournament site selection plan. If a section

R C) Substitution u is unable to resolve conﬂ ict over a plan, the Commissioner shall

e 1) Any member of the roster may be substituted for an originally

s establish a plan. 6) The Board of Control shall determine the site of the state fi nals named individual squad member prior to the section competition. after receiving the Commissioner’s recommendation, and shall 2) No individual participating in the section competition for a be guided by necessary hotel facilities, playing facilities, and specifi c squad may compete in a different division at the state community/area support. competition. 3) The same competitors that participate in the specifi c division at III) COMPETITION MANAGERS the section competition shall participate in that division at the A) Selection of Tournament Manager state competition. 1) The Commissioner will appoint a manager for each of the 4) In the event of an injury, substitution can be made in compliance section tournaments, and shall serve as the manager for the with the Injuries During Competition section of these rules. state tournament. The Commissioner may appoint as many assistant managers as deemed necessary to manage the event. V) OFFICIALS,/JUDGES/TIMERS 2) It is the duty of each section manager to notify all schools A) Requirements participating in the tournament as to the time and place of 1) All judges shall be assigned by the KHSAA. the tournament, to supply him or her with entry material 2) Judges must annually license and complete training as and instructions, to invite their participation, and make all conducted by UDA. arrangements to conduct the tournament. 3) Judges should be aware of and report to the KHSAA any 3) It is an explicit duty of each tournament manager to inform confl icts of interest with regard to assignments. the association IMMEDIATELY as to the bracket / pairings / B) Number of Judges entries / results when requested by KHSAA staff and according 1) For section, fi ve judges will be used. to the time deadlines provided including the actual site of the 2) For the state competition, fi ve (5) judges will be used. 71 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK C) Exceptions to any of these requirements must be approved by the 1) Member schools should strongly support the rights and Commissioner. privileges of the artists that produce the musical scores and VI) CHAMPION, TROPHIES AND AWARDS other pieces that are sometimes used in conjunction with A) Section competitions. The champion of each section within each division will be squad 2) It is the obligation of each school and team to ensure compliance with the highest fi nal score after deductions. with applicable state and federal law with regard to copyright B) State and trademark protection. The champion of each division at the state competition will be 3) It is strongly advised that coaches not allow cheerleaders squad with the highest score after deductions. to perform using recorded or live music before any audience C) Trophies and Awards without securing the proper license and permission from the 1) Section American Society of Composers, Artists and Publishers, 2690 a) Trophies will be given to each section and division competition Cumberland Parkway, Suite 490, Atlanta, GA, 30339, (800) 492- winner and runner-up. 7227. b) The trophies at the section shall be paid from the gate receipts 4) Squads are required to adhere to USA Cheer Music Specifi cations of the section event. and the approved list of vendors. 2) State 5) It is also advised that the proper mechanical license be a) The state competition in each division shall have awarded obtained if necessary for anyone duplicating music to be used in a trophy to the champion, runner-up, third place and fourth conjunction with cheer competition by contacting the Harry Fox place teams. Agency, 711 Third Avenue, New York, NY, 10017. b) The Association will bear the costs of all trophies at the state D) Injuries During Competition competition. 1) If a team member is seriously injured or becomes extremely ill VII) FINANCES, PASSES during judging, he/she may be excused for the remainder of the A) Section competition without the team’s being disqualifi ed or penalized 1) The participating schools may adopt by majority vote, any plan unless as specifi cally detailed in the execution grid scoring. that they desire for the distribution of receipts. All gross receipts 2) However, the team is expected to show competence in adjusting prior to any distribution shall include any applicable advance to the member’s absence. payment made by teams to help offset event costs. 3) A legal substitute from the roster would be allowed to cheer 2) If no plan can be agreed upon, the following shall prevail: the remainder of this competition at the discretion of the coach a) A mileage fee of $1.00 per team per mile for each necessary provided that person had not cheered in another division at the trip should be allowed for travel expense. An allowance section competition. for one meal at $5.00 per team member per trip to the 4) Injuries during performance shall be handled as follows: tournament should be allowed. a) If a coach chooses to stop a routine/cheer due to an injury/ b) The host school shall be allowed fi fteen (15) percent of illness that would endanger the rest of the team or the injured the gross ticket receipts derived from the district or section party, he or she must notify the person in charge. tournament for rental of the gymnasium and other services b) If a coach enters the performing surface, the routine/cheer rendered to include setup and clean-up charges and for shall be stopped. paying documented incidental bills related to the tournament c) After a routine/cheer has been stopped due to an injury/ that are approved by the participating teams. illness, the decision as to whether or not to repeat the routine/ c) Prior to any additional distribution, the gross receipts, less cheer shall be left to the discretion of the coach. the host designated share outlined in subsection (2), shall be d) The injured person cannot perform in the restarted routine reduced by team travel expenses and the amounts paid for or any remaining categories of the competition. An alternate game offi cials and trophies. would be allowed to cheer the remainder of the competition. d) The remainder of the profi t shall be divided among the schools e) The person in charge of the competition shall have the team participating in the tournament and the non-participating repeat the routine/cheer after fi ve (5) teams have performed schools in accordance with previously approved plans. or after ten (10) minutes, should this unforeseen accident e) The host school should be allowed the profi ts made on happen at the end of the competition. Judges shall judge programs, concessions, parking, etc. the repeat performance from the point at which the injury B) State occurred. Any notes/judging of the fi rst performance up until

CCompetition Rules The Association will ﬁ nance the state competition. After all the point of injury will be included in the judge’s ﬁ nal score.

o m expenses have been paid, the Kentucky High School Athletic f) If the person in charge feels that more time is needed to p regroup, he/she shall have ﬁ nal authority to make this e Association shall retain proﬁ ts from the state competition.

t i decision. t C) Passes

i o The competing teams in the postseason events will be afforded E) Warmup and Sound Check

R passes to accommodate the squad size plus four (4) additional 1) Every attempt should be made to provide warm-up time prior to

u l the beginning of the competition at all levels. e competitors and a maximum of four (4) coaches, all of whom shall s meet the criteria of Bylaw 25. No additional passes will be issued. 2) Teams shall be allowed to have a sound check prior to the VIII) SPORT-ACTIVITY SPECIFIC COMPETITION RULES beginning of their routines. A) Playing Rules (Competition Rules) 1) Detailed and binding instructions, both for managers and participating teams, shall be published on the KHSAA website. B) Squad Size/Divisions 1) A school may enter not more than a total of two squads (no competitor on both teams) in not more than one division each of section/state competition in the following competitions: a) The Dance categories shall be Hip Hop, Jazz and Pom. b) Squads may enter a small division (7-16 participants) or Large Division (17-30 participants) in each dance category 2) Any team advancing from section to state, must compete in the same division at state as they competed in at section. C) Competitions, Scoresheets, Scoring 1) The UDA rules, judge’s score sheet and all related technical sheets are to be used at both section and state competitions. 2) For State Competition, ﬁ ve (5) routine judges are to be used. D) Music and Routine Rights

72 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK CASE SITUATIONS RELATED TO THE COMPETITION the Association consider sponsoring a championship. The RULES of the KENTUCKY HIGH SCHOOL ATHLETIC achievement of this percentage is no guarantee of the development of a championship as the Board of Control must ASSOCIATION consider fi scal and legal consequences such as the Association Specifi c case situations are contained in this section of the KHSAA budget, the budget of the member schools and the impact on Handbook which are interpretations and rulings which have such things as Title IX. been made by the Commissioner in accordance with applicable Twenty-fi ve member schools located in at least three (3) different provisions of the KHSAA Constitution. These interpretations basketball regions shall participate each year in order that the supplement the printed rules but do not in any manner substitute Association maintains a championship. for the actual rule. Many of these rulings have established These criteria may be waived by the Board of Control in order precedent for the interpretation or enforcement of these provisions, to sponsor a championship in any sport that does not confl ict and remain in place until further altered, re-interpreted, or with state or federal law and which provides additional otherwise set aside. Specifi c inquiries not addressed by published participation opportunities exclusively for females. interpretations should be submitted in writing to the Commissioner The Association shall survey the membership every three years to of the KHSAA, 2280 Executive Drive, Lexington, KY 40505. determine interest in new offerings. Interpretive questions or eligibility rulings shall be requested and issued in writing. Case CR-5- Who is in control of the media and press at KHSAA sponsored competition? Case CR-1- What is the purpose of the Competition Rules 1) The intellectual property, corporate, broadcasting and media of the KHSAA? rights to the State championship rounds of the KHSAA In many sports and sports activities, there are decisions that have postseason championships belong exclusively to the KHSAA, to be made to establish a framework for competition. These including titling agreements and sponsorships. No member rules (different than the Playing Rules) establish alignments, school may approve or sign an agreement that includes rights bracketing provisions and championship arrangements. In to state contests (delayed or live). all cases, the Board of Control has fi nal jurisdiction over the 2) The intellectual property, corporate, broadcasting and media Competition Rules. rights to the postseason rounds prior to the state fi nals Case CR-2- What are the current championships of the belong exclusively to the KHSAA, including titling agreements KHSAA? and sponsorships. No member school can sign an exclusive The KHSAA sponsors (sanctions) sports championship events agreement for a postseason round (District, Region, semi- in the fall, winter and spring seasons. Fall championships are state) without agreement between the schools and approval considered to be cross country (boys and girls), fi eld hockey, of the KHSAA Offi ce. golf (boys and girls), soccer (boys and girls), volleyball (girls), 3) The intellectual property, corporate, broadcasting and media and football (combined); winter championships are basketball rights to the postseason rounds prior to the state fi nals belong (boys and girls), wrestling (combined) and swimming and exclusively to the KHSAA, but are assigned to the Principal diving (boys and girls); spring championships are baseball of each institution for management and control. No member (boys), softball (fastpitch for girls), tennis (boys and girls) and school shall sign an exclusive regular season agreement track and fi eld (boys and girls) that would “Shut out” its opponent from any audio, video In addition, the KHSAA sponsors (sanctions) a state championship streaming or having the opportunity to do so. in the Sport Activities of Archery (combined), Bass Fishing 4) At all levels of competition during postseason play, control of (combined), Bowling (Boys and Girls) and Cheer (All Girl and media access and location at those contests is with the KHSAA. Coed divisions). 5) At all levels of competition, including district, region, sectional, Case CR-3- What sports and sport activities are insured and state competition in KHSAA sponsored tournaments and by the KHSAA? meets, managers are to make allowances for members of the The KHSAA Board of Control will purchase Catastrophe Insurance, media to tape portions of the contests at no charge to the using the member dues and tournament receipts, to insure the media outlet, as long as the taping is for the sole purpose of student-athletes who compete in the sanctioned sports and news highlights. sport activities of the KHSAA. In addition, students serving 6) Contact the KHSAA Communications Director with questions. in a support capacity at those sponsored events (managers, Case CR-6- Who is empowered to make decisions at trainers, sideline cheerleaders (providing they comply with the KHSAA tournaments when inclement weather forces

CCompetition Rules o NFHS rules restrictions). postponement of contests or events?

p Such insurance coverage shall be in force from the ﬁ rst day of While it would be ideal if all parties could meet and agree on any

e t the Bylaw 23, Limitation of Seasons in a sponsored sport or re-scheduling of games necessitated by inclement weather or

t i other natural events, this may not be practical. It is the duty o sport activity, through the last day, provided such competition

complies with all parts of the Bylaw and its individual of the tournament manager to make decisions with regards to

R u competitors comply with all applicable KHSAA bylaws. The re-scheduling in the event of postponement and ensure that all

e s deductible for this policy shall be published in a timely manner teams, media outlets and schools are properly notifi ed. to ensure that the school and student-athletes have adequate Case CR-7- Is it possible for a winner and corresponding opportunity to comply with Bylaw 12. runner-up in baseball, basketball, fi eld hockey, soccer, The KHSAA Board of Control will purchase General Liability softball or volleyball district tournament to meet Insurance, using the member dues and tournament receipts, to before the fi nal region game? provide for General Liability coverage for the Association and No, because they are to be placed in opposite brackets. its agents and assignees, in all KHSAA sponsored competition Case CR-8- Is there a mandatory brand of game ball to in all sports (postseason) for which the Association sponsors be used in postseason play in baseball, basketball, a championship. The Commissioner shall ensure through football, soccer, softball and volleyball? all forms of due diligence, that all levels of these sponsored Yes, the Association has a long-term agreements with multiple championships are conducted in accordance with applicable sponsors. Staff at KHSAA can assist with specifi c model KHSAA Competition Rules in order to maintain the integrity numbers, although use of specifi c numbers is not mandated. of the policy. In all postseason contests in baseball, softball, football and Case CR-4- How many schools are required to agree basketball, a Rawlings brand ball (or Worth brand in softball) to participate in KHSAA sponsored postseason with the proper NFHS authenticating mark shall be used for competition in order for the Association to hold a There is no requirement that a KHSAA logo appear on the ball, championship in that sport or sport-activity? or that a specifi c ball number be used. Fifty (50) member schools located in at least three (3) different In all postseason contests in soccer, a SELECT Sports brand ball basketball regions shall agree to fi eld a team in order that with the proper NFHS authenticating mark shall be used. There 73 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK is no requirement that a KHSAA logo appear on the ball, or that softball. a specifi c ball number be used. Case CR-12- How are the contest sites selected for In all postseason contests in volleyball, a Baden brand ball with region tournaments/meets/contests? the proper NFHS authenticating mark shall be used. There is no The Commissioner establishes all regional sites. The Commissioner requirement that a KHSAA logo appear on the ball, or that a shall be generally guided by a site selection plan approved by specifi c ball number be used. a 2/3 vote of the member schools in the region, but is not Case CR-9– Are there any restrictions on the scheduling compelled to assign the event to that site specifi ed in the plan, and playing of games in a “seeded district” in baseball, and shall only assign to the sites meeting specifi ed sports basketball, soccer, softball, or volleyball? specifi c criteria. Yes. Principals, Athletic Directors and Coaches should consult Changes to a requested site selection plan shall be confi rmed by the Competition Rules related to each of these sports for balloting of the Principals or Designated Representatives of the more specifi c dates for tournament meetings and allowances member schools. for scheduling of these meetings. All games involved in the Case CR-13- May a name be added to the roster or entry calculation of a seed position SHALL be played on or before the form after the fi rst day of postseason competition? Wednesday prior to the start of postseason play. Games played No, changes cannot be made unless otherwise provided in after that time SHALL NOT factor into the seeded position. the competition rules for a specifi c sport. The principal shall Case CR-10- How are the tournament sites selected for check the online roster in all sports and sport-activities to district tournament sites for baseball, basketball, ensure that all players are on the list as the rosters are locked soccer, softball in the event that agreement cannot be after postseason play begins. For individual sports using the reached on a site selection plan? published entry list and/or forms, the specifi c sport touranment If a site selection plan cannot be reached on fi rst round (normally rules will address any options for substitution or correction, if district) tournaments, the Commissioner will intervene and such options exist. establish a rotation plan subject to appeal to the Board of Case CR-14- How is it determined that a meet counts Control. The site selection plan shall be confi rmed by annual against the four meet minimum in Track and Field or balloting during the season and reported to the Association Cross Country? along with seeding decisions. Rotating the tournament sites In order to count as a meet for the four meet minimum a meet does not necessarily mean that each school shall host the shall be a meet which rises to the standard of counting as a tournament at that school’s home site, but that each school, meet towards the interpretations of Bylaw 23. In addition, with available proper and adequate facilities, shall have the in Cross Country, the distance would be a minimum of 2500 opportunity to host the tournament, even if an alternative site meters and a maximum of 5000 meters and involved entries is required due to site requirements within a given sport. from two or more schools. To count towards the minimums, Case CR-11- Is there a deadline for a district host school the meets may be at the varsity or nonvarsity level in terms in baseball, basketball, soccer, softball or volleyball to of meet structure. It shall be counted in the same manner for select a playing site if the school home site doesn’t all competitors (varsity, JV or freshman). The school approved meet the requirements for holding the tournament? or provided uniform shall be worn in this competition. In Yes. Through various rules and rulings in past years, every school accordance with Bylaw 22, a school representative shall in a specifi c district alignment shall have an opportunity to accompany the team. serve as the host for the tournament. Each school may, of Case CR-15- If a Cross Country Meet is interrupted by course, decline that opportunity. However, this requirement weather, can other races be run that day? ensures that on a periodic basis, all schools get to share in Yes. The particular interrupted race is considered complete and the concession and parking proceeds, host share of the ticket counts both towards meet limits and participation minimums. receipts and other benefi ts that come from serving as the host. If other competition can resume after required delays, that It is recognized that all schools in a given alignment grouping is permissible. Only races actually started can count towards will not meet the tournament specifi cations. meet limits or participation minimums. For this reason, the following steps shall be taken by the schools in the district- Case CR-16 - Are there policies on participation by boys 1) The schools shall meet and decide what facilities can hold the on girls’ teams and vice-versa? Yes. See the Board of Control policies for complete details.

CCompetition Rules attendance of the last ﬁ ve years of the tournament based on

m the fan followings of the schools, and satisfy other logistical Case CR-17 - Are there policy statements or p needs such as accessibility, parking, etc. (agreed sites). In recommendations from the Commissioner’s ofﬁ ce on

i addition, all sites must meet any adopted site criteria for the postgame activity by teams and individuals?

i o sport that has been approved by the Board of Control. If there Yes. Several sports have “traditions” regarding postgame

R is a disagreement, the Board of Control can serve as the ﬁ nal handshakes, etc. by team members (both en masse and as

u l resolution and KHSAA staff shall assist in that determination. individuals), but none of them have such action dictated by

e s 2) The discussion on site applicability is separate from the ability playing rules. While it is an obvious sign of sportsmanship and to “host”, that is being the tournament manager, operating civility, many incidents have occurred both in Kentucky (more concessions, etc. as all schools shall be given that opportunity than two dozen in the last three years in Kentucky alone) and to host, just not necessarily at a site that cannot accommodate throughout the country, where fi ghts and physical confl icts the event. have broken out during these postgame handshakes. And this 3) From that list of agreed sites, the rotation of sites is to be is not restricted to specifi c sports. considered, factoring in of course, that all schools shall be Unfortunately, the adrenaline and effort required to participate in given a chance (if they want) to host, even if it isn’t played at the sport sometimes seems to deplete the supply of judgement the host school’s home playing facility. available to participants. And this can be particularly 4) In a year when the designated host’s home facility does not problematic when there is a lack of an appropriate level of meet the specifi cations for holding the tournament, the fi nal adult supervision, or counterproductive actions by the adults selection as to the playing site rests with the designated host involved with the team. school. That school has sole discretion to make that decision, During 2013-14, the following directors were issued by the but is compelled to choose only from the list of agreed facilities Commissioner to the membership for all ofthe schools and as mentioned in (1) above. offi cials regarding post game in baseball, basketball, football, 5) In a year when the designated host school’s home facility does soccer, softball, volleyball and wrestling: not meet the specifi cations for holding the tournament, the Following the contests, offi cials are to quickly and effi ciently designation shall be made by September 20 in volleyball and leave the playing facility following all rules mandated duties soccer; January 1 in basketball; and April 15 for baseball and and ensure that the rules book mandated jurisdiction ends

74 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK promptly. There is no need for offi cials to secure the game contained in the Competition rules for the Sport or Sport balls, shake hands with the coaches or players, or stick around Activity. the playing area for any other reason. Whenever a sport or sport activity is to be realigned, the Board Offi cials have no role in what goes on in postgame, including shall direct the Commissioner to produce the necessary handshakes, etc. after jurisdiction has ended. Offi cials also information as to seed discussion by the Board of Control. The have NO role in administering this time period. Offi cials criteria and factors to be used in developing a draft alignment choosing to involve themselves in postgame activities will be shall adhere to the following steps: penalized appropriately; Identifi cation as to whether or not enrollment classifi cations Game management and the administration of the participating will be used; team(s) are solely responsible for what happens after the Plot/Diagram the location of all competing schools; contest is concluded. Begin by looking at geographic clusters of schools. Geography Certain interaction is required by the NFHS playing rules (i.e. (including specifi c travel route information) is an important the awarding of a bout winner in wrestling). Other postgame criteria for placement in groups (regions, districts, etc.), but rituals such as handshakes, etc. must be closely monitored is not the sole determinant for placement; by school offi cials and are not a part of the game regulated Travel routes must be reviewed as a potential factor, as well as by game offi cials. However, any unsportsmanlike conduct the identifi cation of the existence of multiple travel routes; occurring during this time will subject the coach/player to In the non-classifi ed team sports (baseball, basketball, soccer, penalties and discipline; and softball, volleyball), the basketball alignment should be an The coaches and administration of the teams are always initial framework, specifi cally the region boundaries; responsible for the individual conduct of the members of the If possible in the non-classifi ed team sports, the district team following the contest and shall be held accountable for boundaries should be important element, but the level of such. participation of the schools in the district must be factor; Henceforth, any incidents by an individual squad member The unique factors of each sport, particularly the individual (including coaches) or group of squad members that results in sports, must be reviewed including facilities; and unsporting acts immediately following the contest will result The participation and alignment history, both individual in a penalty against the member school athletic program, and teams, is a factor in consideration, but not the fi nal and additional penalties against the individuals or schools as determinant; deemed appropriate following investigation. When reviewing alternative suggestions for alignments, the Case CR-18 - Who pays for the trophies for KHSAA Board shall prioritize the requests from the membership that postseason Competition? effect the requesting school over those suggestions that result In all sports and sport-activities, the host of the event is from suggestions about other schools without effecting the responsible for the payment of trophies and is permitted to suggesting school. take that amount for the standard trophies ordered by the The following factors are NOT to be considered: Association from gate receipts or other agreed fees. Those Past success or failure; not charging a fee for admission are permitted to assess each Enrollment (in a non-classifi ed sport); member school for entry into the event to help cover these Socio-economic status and student body composition; and other costs, but such assessment shall be included in any Type of school (A1, D1, F1, J1, M1, R1); and fi nancial settlement published for the event. Specifi c desires of coaches (input must be from administrative level). Case CR-19 - Are fi nancial reconcilliation reports required to be submitted to the KHSAA after KHSAA postseason events? Yes. All levels of KHSAA postseason event require a fi nancial reconcilliation. Case CR-20 - Has the Board of Control adopted a position statement or policy on the realignment / alignment of teams? Yes. On a perpetual basis, the Commissioner shall ensure that

CCompetition Rules staff maintains a current alignment of teams in each sport with

m the following review points considered: p If a single school adds a team (or individuals) or deletes a

i team (or all individuals), the alignment may be revised on

i o an ongoing basis by the Commissioner;

R The Board of Control may, at its own discretion, choose to

u l realign all teams participation in a sport or sport activity

e s based on input from the Commissioner; A realignment may also be caused by a previously adopted alignment having an expiration of its valid period. This is especially important in the enrollment based sports (classifi ed sports). Cross Country/Track and Field and Football are aligned on a four-year alignment period; Cross Country and Track and Field shall have the same alignment; Football shall be aligned based on the average four-year enrollment of boys in the school, including the year in which the realignment project is completed, and the fi nal alignment shall attempt to result in a fi nal product being adopted at least twelve (12) months notice to the member schools for scheduling; Cross Country/Track and Field shall be aligned on a not less than every four year basis, using the average four-year enrollment of total students in the school, including the year in which the realignment project is completed; and Specifi c parameters about each sport alignment shall be

75 - COMPETITION RULES- 2019-2020 KHSAA HANDBOOK